2015 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

2015 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual
CAUTION!
Before towing this vehicle please refer to pages 259-271 and pages
286-288 to ensure that you do not damage your transmission or other
powertrain components. Failure to follow these towing instructions will
result in damage that is NOT covered under warranty.
Table of Contents
1
INTRODUCTION
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
10
INDEX
.....................................................................3
.............................................9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
1
2
1
INTRODUCTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . .
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . .
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . .
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.4
.4
.5
.6
.8
.8
.8
3
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler
Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go
places and perform tasks that conventional
passenger cars are not intended. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger
cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to
become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended
for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering,
and transmission and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different
road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience, but as in driving any vehicle,
take it easy as you begin. When driving off-road
4
or working the vehicle, don’t overload it or
expect it to overcome the forces of nature.
Always observe local laws wherever you drive.
by an authorized dealer or distributor who has
the qualified personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all service.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or a collision. Be sure to read the
“On-Road/ Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally
interested in your complete satisfaction with this
vehicle. If you encounter a service or warranty
problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction, discuss the matter with your authorized
dealer or distributor’s management.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or a collision.
Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds may
result in loss of control, collision with other
vehicles or objects, going off the road, or overturning; any of which may lead to serious injury
or death. Also, failure to use seat belts subjects
the driver and passengers to a greater risk of
injury or death.
To keep your vehicle running at its best, have
your vehicle serviced at recommended intervals
Your authorized dealer or distributor will be
happy to assist you with any questions about
your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when
some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,
or other unsafe driving actions that can cause
loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover
of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVED
TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and
maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in
this Owner’s Manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
After you have read the Owner’s Manual, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient
reference and remain with the vehicle when
sold.
The manufacturer reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or to
make additions to or improvements in its prod-
ucts without imposing any obligations upon
itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes
the features that are standard or available as
extra cost options. Therefore, some of the
equipment and accessories in this publication
may not appear on your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual first
before driving your vehicle and before attaching or installing parts/accessories or
making other modifications to the vehicle.
In view of the many replacement parts and
accessories from various manufacturers available on the market, the manufacturer cannot be
certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will
not be impaired by the attachment or installation
of such parts. Even if such parts are officiallyapproved (for example, by a general operating
permit for the part or by constructing the part in
an officially approved design), or if an individual
operating permit was issued for the vehicle after
the attachment or installation of such parts, it
cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving
5
safety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore,
neither experts nor official agencies are liable.
The manufacturer only assumes responsibility
when parts, which are expressly authorized or
recommended by the manufacturer, are attached or installed at an authorized dealer. The
same applies when modifications to the original
condition are subsequently made on the manufacturer’s vehicles.
Your warranties do not cover any part that the
manufacturer did not supply. Nor do they cover
the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might
be caused or needed because of the installation
or use of non-manufacturer parts, components,
equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do your
warranties cover the costs of repairing damage
or conditions caused by any changes to your
vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications.
6
Original Mopar® parts and accessories and
other products approved by the manufacturer,
including qualified advice, are available at your
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
the factory-trained technicians and genuine
Mopar® parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.
Copyright © 2013 Chrysler International.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which
section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s
Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of
the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or
throughout this Owner’s Manual:
7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/
ALTERATIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings
and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision
resulting in serious injury or death.
VIN Location
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on a plate located on the left front corner
of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also is stamped into the right front body,
behind the right front seat. Move the right front
seat forward to allow better viewing of the
stamped VIN.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
8
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
YOUR VEHICLE
• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . .
• Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . .
• Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . .
• STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . .
• To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . .
• To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . .
• SENTRY KEY®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . .
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . .
• To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.12
.12
.12
.13
.14
.14
.14
.14
.15
.15
.15
.15
.15
.16
.16
.17
.17
.17
9
•
•
•
•
•
10
• To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors . . . .
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . .
• Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped
• Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . . . . . . .
• Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) .
• Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags . . . .
• Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.18
.18
.18
.19
.19
.20
.21
.22
.24
.24
.26
.26
.27
.28
.31
.34
.34
.34
.35
.35
.36
.38
.38
.39
.40
.42
• Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . .
• SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle .
• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.46
.47
.60
.61
.61
.61
.61
. . . . . . .63
11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go™ feature, (refer to "Keyless Enter-NGo™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle" for further information).
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also
for locking the glove box. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key
out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth
position is START, during start RUN will illuminate.
Key Fob
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
12
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE:
You can insert the double-sided emergency
key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF.
In addition to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
NOTE:
With the Uconnect® system, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time
for this feature is programmable. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
13
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle,
cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive
electronic steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition
key. If the steering wheel is moved to one of the
lock positions with the key in the off positions,
the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering
wheel one-quarter revolution in either direction,
turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until
the lock engages.
14
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock
Cycle the ignition and start the engine.
NOTE:
If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to
the right to disengage it. If you turned the
wheel to the left to engage the lock, turn the
wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only
Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb
check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some after-market remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• With Keyless Enter-N-Go™, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is
provided with a four-digit Personal Identification
Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized
dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of
Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
the interior switches for door locks, and power
liftgate are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse, and the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
To Arm The System
General Information
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
Alarm:
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle ignition
keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The Sentry Key® operates on a carrier frequency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is subject to the following
conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference
that may be received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED
1. Remove the key from the ignition system
(refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system
is "OFF".
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition
system is "OFF" and the key is physically
removed from the ignition.
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is armed,
15
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob
available in the same exterior zone (refer to
"Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further
information).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle
(if equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™"
in "Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle" for further information).
16
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go™, press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Start/Stop button (requires at least one
valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™, insert a valid key into the
ignition switch and turn the key to the ON
position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the
liftgate button on the RKE transmitter
cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains
armed during power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens
any door the alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, the interior power door lock
switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights blink three times
when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle
for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting
in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to
“Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN
from the OFF position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
(RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock
the doors, or open the power liftgate from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using
a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all
RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
• The front courtesy overhead console and
door courtesy lights do not turn on if the
dimmer control is in the ⴖDome ONⴖ position (extreme top position).
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door
or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom
position).
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
17
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the
first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Remote Key
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90
seconds when the doors are unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is
programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect®. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
18
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Programming Additional
Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling
may apply.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that
are on the back housing or the printed
circuit board.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key
Removal
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2
flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry
the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
General Information
DOOR LOCKS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table
or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the
battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap
the two halves together.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The
expected life of the battery is a minimum of
three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a
radio station tower, airport transmitter, and
some mobile or CB radios.
Manual Door Lock Knob
19
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause severe personal
injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
shift lever.
(Continued)
20
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each
front door panel. Press the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key
Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the
door.
If you press the door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition switch and the driver’s door
is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the
door. The door may be unlocked manually by
raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock
feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the
customer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
To Engage Or Disengage The ChildProtection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the
lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If
Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock
all the doors when the driver’s door is opened if
the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
Child-Protection Door Lock
System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped
with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
For emergency exit from the rear seats when
the Child-Protection Door Lock System is
engaged, manually raise the door lock knob
to the unlocked position, roll down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
21
KEYLESSENTER-N-GO™ *
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicleʼs Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicleʼs door(s) without having to press the
RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
To Unlock From The Driverʼs Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driverʼs door handle,
grab the driverʼs front door handle to unlock the
driverʼs door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/
OFF; refer to “Uconnect®” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
*IF EQUIPPED
22
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle,
grab the front passenger door handle to unlock
all four doors automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driverʼs door unlock preference setting
(“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock
All Doors 1st Press”).
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped
will arm the theft alarm.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it
has been raining on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Uconnect®” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
driverʼs front door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive
Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside
your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed the vehicle
checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for
any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one
of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected
outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and
chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt
ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE
transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate
will open with the handle and no RKE Transmitter is required.
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter
within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
passive entry lock button located to the right of
electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in EVIC, all doors will unlock when
you push the button on the liftgate. If ⴖUnlock Driver Door 1st pressⴖ is programmed
in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when
you press the button on the liftgate For
further information, refer to “Uconnect®” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate handle. With a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m)
of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate
handle for a power open on vehicles equipped
with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic liftgate
handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
To Lock The Liftgate
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
Passive entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release
Switch
2 — Lock Button
Location
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or
passenger front door handle, press the door
handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
23
NOTE:
The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle being used to lock the vehicle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the
driver’s door trim panel. There is a single switch
on the front passenger door and rear doors
which operate the front passenger and rear
passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing
the door handle lock button. This could unlock
the door(s).
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before
you can lock or unlock the doors, using
either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is
locked by pulling the door handle, without
the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate
if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
24
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has
been turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, and do not leave a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window
switches have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press
the window switch past the first detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To open the window part way, press to the first
detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
Auto Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection — Driver And Front Passenger
Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
Auto Up Window Switches
25
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function
unexpectedly during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold it to close the window manually.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely
and continue to hold the switch down for an
additional two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear doors. To disable the window controls on
the rear doors, press the Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls, press the
Window Lockout button again.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
26
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate handle. With a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m)
of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate
handle to open with one fluid motion.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch
up for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
Wind Buffeting
To Lock The Liftgate
Window Lockout Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter
within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
passive entry lock button located to the right of
electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will
only lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
handle.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release
Switch
2 — Lock Button
Location
The power liftgate may be opened
by pressing the electronic liftgate
handle (refer to Keyless EnterN-Go located in Things To Know
Before Starting) or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the
LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate.
Once the liftgate is open, pressing the button
twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or
closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console, or closed
by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left
rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear
trim panel once will close the liftgate only, this
button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times, the turn signals will
flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening
or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled
in the EVIC) and the liftgate chime will be
audible. For further information, refer to
"Uconnect®" in "Understanding Your Instrument
Panel".
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The
emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located
on the liftgate trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
27
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle
speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from
the liftgate before pressing any of the
power liftgate switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate
while it is closing or opening, the liftgate
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to
the side of the liftgate. Light pressure
28
*IF EQUIPPED
anywhere along these strips will cause
the liftgate to return to the open position.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open
position for rear liftgate close button on
the left rear trim, near the liftgate opening
to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open,
press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob
to fully open the liftgate, and then press it
again to close.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will
reverse to the full open position.
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual
operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop and the
liftgate must be opened or closed
manually.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you
put the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will
continue to power close. However, ve-
hicle movement may result in a detection
of an obstruction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be
injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the
driver and all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
passenger *
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
located on top of the front seats (integrated
into the head restraint) *
webbing into position by extending the belt all
the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or
secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window *
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag *
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB) *
• An energy-absorbing steering column and
steering wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners
that may enhance occupant protection by
managing occupant energy during an impact
event
• All seat belt systems (except the driverʼs and
front passenger) include Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt
*IF EQUIPPED
If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. Refer to LATCH —
Child Seat Anchorage System for more information.
If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE:
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag
to have different rates of inflation based on
several factors, including the severity and
type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death
or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint
in a rear seat.
29
Children that are not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child
Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear
facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible
and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to
“Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their
lap and shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical to
allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to
inflate.
30
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between you and
the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, contact the Customer Center. Phone
numbers are provided under ⴖIf You Need
Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the air
bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment could cause serious
injury, including death. Air Bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air
Bags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you are
not properly buckled up. You can strike the
interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in
your vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of
you striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around
the large bones of your body. These are
the strongest parts of your body and can
take the forces of a collision best.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of part of the belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
(Continued)
31
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far
as necessary to make the belt go around your
lap.
Latch Plate To Buckle
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move
too far forward, increasing the possibility of
injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
32
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so
that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant
to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs,
below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap
portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly.
In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt is straight. If you can’t
straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the belt.
release button to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
Removing Slack From Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to
its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Press the
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller
than average, you will prefer a higher position.
When you release the button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
33
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature.
This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt
anchorage until it is locked into position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the
seat to position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting
Procedure
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating
Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver
Center
Passenger
First Row
N/A
N/A
N/A
Second
Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
34
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s midsection so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as
the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s midsection. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a "click."
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode
(ALR) — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically
pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all rear
passenger-seating positions with a combination
lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in
a seating position that has a belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking
Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the
safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or
any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury
in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an
energy management feature in the front seating
positions to help further reduce the risk of injury
in the event of a head-on collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner. This feature is designed to
help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions
may be equipped with pretensioning devices
that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in
child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for
proper seat belt placement by the occupant.
The seat belt still must be worn snugly and
positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
35
Supplemental Active Head
Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or
may not deploy in the event of a front or side
impact. However if during a front impact, a
secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may
deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting
and positioning the head restraint, refer to
“Adjusting Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
36
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a collision.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint
Front Half (Soft Foam
and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint
Back Half (Decorative
Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint
Guide Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a
collision, you must reset the head restraint on
the driver’s and front passenger seat. You can
recognize when the Active Head Restraint has
been triggered by the fact that they have moved
forward (as shown in step three of the resetting
procedure).
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of
the vehicle then down to engage the locking
mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
37
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should
lock into the back decorative plastic half.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the
driver and front passenger (if equipped with
front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is
unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints, see an
authorized dealer.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head
Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.
38
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after
the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are
fastened. After the sequence completes, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated
until the respective seat belts are fastened. The
driver should instruct all other occupants to
fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide
both audio and visual notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an
animal or heavy object is on the front passenger
seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped).
It is recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE:
Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to
illuminate while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt
remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the
seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping
the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby
safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the
belt across the thighs and as snug across the
hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it
does not come across the abdomen. That way
the strong bones of the hips will take the force if
there is a collision.
sitting next to a window. The SABIC air bags,
are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide
enhanced protection for an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of
the front seats.
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Air Bags *
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for
both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driverʼs Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in
the center of the steering wheel. The passengerʼs Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed
on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is
equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column.
*IF EQUIPPED
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air
Bag
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have
different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
air bag system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Steering Wheel and Column
39
• Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt
Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bag Features *
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy40
*IF EQUIPPED
ment. This low output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm
if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee
bolster in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB) *
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help
protect an occupant during a side impact. The
SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into
the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam
between the front and side of the seatʼs trim
cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a
left side impact deploys the left air bag only and
a right-side impact deploys the right air bag
only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided
by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head
of each outboard occupant that reduce the
potential for side-impact head injuries. The
SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air
bags during deployment could cause you
to be severely injured or killed.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air
bags on both sides of the vehicle may
deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that
are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental SAB
and SABIC air bags during impacts that require
side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the location
of the SABIC. The area where the side
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
WARNING! (Continued)
curtain air bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the SAB; the
performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air
bags, do not have any accessory items
installed which will alter the roof, including
adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not
add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Always sit upright as possible with your back
against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
(Continued)
41
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to
the seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up against or very
close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially
children, should not lean on or sleep against the
door, side windows, or area where the SAB or
SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Side air bags also work with seat belts to
improve occupant protection.
not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear,
side, or rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And
Controls
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in
all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides,
and angle offset collisions. On the other hand,
depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
Knee Impact Bolster
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the
knees of the front passenger, and position the
front occupant for the best interaction with the
Advanced Front Air Bag.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front
and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision
is required. Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the
Advanced Front Air Bags, Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag, Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB), and front seat
belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
several factors, including the severity and type
of impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the
seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending
on several factors, including the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
during a frontal impact.
42
The side air bags will not deploy in all side
collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend
on the severity and type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bags even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light in the instrument
panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on.
After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound if the
light comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature
of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when
the ignition is first turned on, stays on after
you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the
steering wheel and on the right side of the
instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation
rates are possible, based on several factors,
including the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their
full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it
takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented
through the vent holes in the sides of the air
bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Inflator Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
unit is located in the instrument panel trim
beneath the steering column. When the ORC
detects a collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the
air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully
inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds.
43
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
(SAB) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires
the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity
and type of collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the
side air bag inflator on the crash side of the
vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of
non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through
the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in
about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side air bag inflates. This especially
applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined
to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the
ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depend44
ing on the severity and type of collision. In these
events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on
the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side
curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window.
The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to
blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you
if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the side
curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies
to children. The side curtain air bag is only
about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
NOTE:
In a rollover the pretensioners, and/or SAB
and SABIC air bags may deploy on both
sides of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can
aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag
deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event the ORC
will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power or until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or until the
ignition key is removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to
IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to
deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes
cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the
driver and front passenger as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar
to friction rope burns or those you might get
sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have
any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates
the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.
These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect
you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the front seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
(Continued)
45
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags
ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Air Bag Warning
Light monitors the internal circuits
and interconnecting wiring associ46
ated with air bag system electrical components.
While the air bag system is designed to be
maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may
also be disabled. The air bags may not be
ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer
to the label located on the inside of the fuse
block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See
your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN
position.
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and children.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
• “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearwardfacing child restraint on a seat protected by
an air bag in front of it!” Refer to visor and
door shut face mounted labels for
information.
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a
tiny baby, can become a projectile inside
the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child,
no matter how strong you are. The child
and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
(Continued)
47
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have out-grown their forwardfacing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
48
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing
in the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or height
limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats
can be used either rearward-facing or forwardfacing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they
can be used rearward-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should
remain rearward-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rearward facing infant
seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forwardfacing child seats and convertible child seats used
in the forward-facing direction are for children who
are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rearfacing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness
for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or
height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In
a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never
allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
or behind their back.
49
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight
of the Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
50
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
X
X
LATCH – Lower Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor
points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located
at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage
located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Some seating positions may have a top
tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
51
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position only.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
52
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round
bars that are found at the rear of
the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
The lower anchorages are round
bars that are found at the rear of
the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are
just visible when you lean into the
rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
60/40 Seat LATCH Anchorages
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap
In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of
the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel
away from the seat back, this will expose the top
tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap
53
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way
to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a
hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it
is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. Use the seat
belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook
to the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts,
the rear center seat position has an armrest
tether that secures the arm rest in the upward
position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is located
behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic
seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child
Restraint
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
54
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the
plastic seat backing.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some
second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it.
Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in
the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
55
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
56
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on
ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description under “Occupant Restraints.” The
cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap
portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is
pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below
and the following sections for more information
about both types of seat belts.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing
Child Restraints in this Vehicle
ALR / Anchor Locations
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint with a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint to get a better fit.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path of
the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing
in the belt path.
Yes
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all
the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking mode.
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH),
the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full
turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If
it is locked, you should not be able to pull out
any webbing. If the retractor is not locked,
repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child restraint
while you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the vehicle seat.
57
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Cinching Latch Plate (CINCH) — If
Equipped
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row seats,
you may need to recline the seat and / or raise
the head restraint to get a better fit.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
58
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child restraint
while you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release
button facing out, away from the child restraint.
Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the
installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half
turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the
child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move
the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is no
top tether anchorage for that seating position
(see the charts above), move the child restraint
to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on
Seatback)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the
outboard side of the head restraint.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
59
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks, located
on the floor behind the seats, to attach a
child restraint tether anchor.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage — Center Seating
Position
For center seating position route the tether
strap over the seatback and headrest then
attach the hook to the tether anchor located on
the back of the seat.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
60
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi
(800 km). After the initial 60 mi (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate open, make sure that all windows
are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, inspect
the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
61
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See your authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Air Bag Warning Light
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are
firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of
position and interfere with the pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light
is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays
on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause
loss of vehicle control and increase the risk
of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other
floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot
be properly secured to prevent them from
moving and interfering with the pedals or
the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats.
Additional floor mats and other coverings
will reduce the size of the pedal area and
interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular
basis. Always properly reinstall and secure
floor mats that have been removed for
cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall
into the driver footwell while the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
62
WARNING! (Continued)
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the
factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with
the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if
fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks
are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
63
64
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
VEHICLE
• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .
• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .
• Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If Equipped
• Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped . . .
• Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .
• BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .
• Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Passenger’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.71
.71
.71
.72
.72
.72
.72
.73
.73
.73
.73
.73
.76
.77
.78
.78
.79
.80
65
• Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment — Recline . . . . .
• Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . .
• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Ventilated Seats With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped.
• Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Reclining Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights Only . . . . . . . .
• Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights — If
Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
.80
.80
.81
.81
.83
.83
.86
.87
.87
.88
.88
.89
.90
.90
.91
.91
.92
.92
.92
.93
.93
.93
.94
.94
.94
•
•
•
•
•
• Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
• Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
• Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
• Courtesy Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
• Ambient Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
• Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
• Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
• Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
• High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
• Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
• Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
• Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .101
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .102
• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
• To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
• To Resume Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
• To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
• To Accelerate For Passing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
67
• ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .104
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
• Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
• To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
• To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
• To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
• To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
• To Vary The Speed Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
• Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
• Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
• Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
• Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
• FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
• PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .120
• ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
• ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
• ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
• Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . .123
• Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
• ParkSense® System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
68
• PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . .
• Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ParkSense® System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . .
• Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 5.0 . . . . .
• Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN.
• POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunroof Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition OFF Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.124
.125
.125
.125
.127
.128
.128
.128
.130
.131
.131
.132
.132
.132
.132
.133
.133
.133
.133
.133
.133
.133
.134
.134
.134
69
•
•
•
•
•
•
70
• Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode. . . . . . . .
• Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . .
• Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . .
• Closing Power Shade — Express. . . . . . . .
• Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . .
• Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . .
CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Glove Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Door Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cargo Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
• Rear Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.134
.135
.135
.135
.135
.135
.135
.135
.135
.136
.136
.136
.138
.139
.139
.139
.140
.141
.141
.141
.142
.143
.144
.144
.144
.145
MIRRORS
NOTE:
Inside Day/Night Mirror
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in reverse
gear to improve rear view viewing.
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can
be reduced by moving the small control under
the mirror to the night position (toward the rear
of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while the small control under the mirror is set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature
can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
71
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions:
• full forward
• full rearward and
Outside Mirrors
• normal.
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with
a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside
mirror.
Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirrors — If Equipped
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and
farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle
or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
72
adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press on
any of the four arrows for the direction that you
want the mirror to move.
The driver and passenger outside mirrors will
automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside
automatic dimming. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver’s side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, press the mirror
select button for the mirror that you want to
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror select
switches (L and R).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold
in, pressing the switch a second time will return
the mirrors to the normal driving position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding the Features of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will
turn on automatically.
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun
visor for increased coverage.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING —
IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the
rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from
the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward
gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or
3.8 m). The zone starts at the outside rear view
mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to
the rear of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached
73
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane
is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your
vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning
light remaining illuminated the entire time
the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
74
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
Warning Light Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during
these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking Traffic
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
75
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects
that are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
76
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use
your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on
either side. If the sensors are blocked by
other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reducing
the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is
intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation.
Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani-
WARNING! (Continued)
mals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Modes Of Operation With EVIC
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System — If Equipped
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to
“Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect®
Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
(Continued)
77
NOTE:
SEATS
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by
the BSM system, the radio is also muted.
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will
request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off.
Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used
78
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two switches
that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
Passenger’s Power Seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way
power passenger seat. The power seat switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switch is used to control the movement of the
seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when you have reached the
desired position.
79
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Manual Front Seats Forward/
Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front
driver or passenger seats. The seats can be
adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
floor.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
Adjustment Bar
Power Lumbar Switch
80
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat
Feature — If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the recline lever and push the seatback
forward. To return to the seating position, raise
the seatback and lock it into place.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt, which could result in
serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat
cushions and seatbacks.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could
cause serious burns due to the increased
surface temperature of the seat.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the driver’s heated seat and heated steering
81
wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect® 5.0 —
If Equipped
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the driver and passenger to operate the seats
independently. The controls for each heater are
located in the Uconnect® system screen.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat
settings.
Press the “Climate” hard-key located on the
right side of the Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected,
heat will be felt within two to five
minutes.
82
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output
will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level
setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF
automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Front Heated Seats With Uconnect®
8.4A/8.4AN — If Equipped
There are two heated seat soft-keys that allow
the driver and passenger to operate the seats
independently. The controls for each heater are
located in the Uconnect® system screen.
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the
bottom of the Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected,
heat will be felt within two to five
minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output
will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level
setting is selected, the system will automatically
switch to LO-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF
automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are
equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and
none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select
HIGH-level heating. Press the
switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the
switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
To operate the system, press the “Controls”
soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect® display.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
heater will provide a boosted heat level during
the first four minutes of operation. Then, the
heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If
the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level ventilation. Press the
soft-key a second time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a third time to shut off
the seat ventilation.
Front Ventilated Seats With
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — If
Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated. Located in the seat
cushion and seatback are small fans that draw
the air from the passenger compartment and
pull air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed
to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear-impact. Head restraints should
83
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be
properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints
should never be adjusted while the vehicle is
in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
press the push button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Push Button
84
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active
Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant
Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a
hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward
when the rear seat is folded to a load floor
position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning
either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard
headrests are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to raise
it, or push downward on the head restraint to
lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
85
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether
refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Folded
Rear Seat Release
60/40 Split Rear Seat
NOTE:
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to
allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.
• Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with
the left outboard or rear center seat belt
buckled.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seatback to fold down easily.
86
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
• Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with
the right outboard seat belt buckled.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up
or folded down position) should not be
used as a play area by children when the
vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back and
release the lever at the desired position. To
return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
a memory switch. Each memory profile contains
desired position settings for the driver seat, side
mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK
button is pressed.
Rear Seat Release
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide
under the seat belt, which could result in
serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE
transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be
linked to memory position 1 and the other
transmitter can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through
87
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if equipped],
and radio station presets).
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either
of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
which memory position has been set.
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the
memory switch.
NOTE:
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either
of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
which memory position has been set.
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless
Enter-N-Go
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (Do not start the
engine).
88
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless
Enter-N-Go
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the
ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable
pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station
presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the
memory switch.
• Memory profiles can be set without the
vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be
in PARK to recall a memory profile.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to
Memory feature can be enabled through
the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to
“Customer- Programmable Features —
Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To
Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to
recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
Before programming your RKE transmitters
you must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the Uconnect® system screen.
Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press
and release the SET (S) button on the memory
switch, then press and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to
your memory settings by following steps 1-4
above and pressing the UNLOCK button
(instead of LOCK) on the RKE transmitter in
Step 4.
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⴖProgramming The Memory Featureⴖ
for instructions on how to set a memory
profile.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the
RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall
memory positions. If a recall is attempted
when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message
will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC).
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the memory switch , press MEMORY
button number 1 on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one
using the RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked
to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two
using the memory switch, press MEMORY
button number 2 on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two
using the RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked
to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror and the steering column stop
moving. A delay of one second will occur before
another recall can be selected.
89
Easy Entry/Exit Seat *
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
• When you remove the Key Fob from the
ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go),
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of
the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the
ignition into the ACC or RUN position.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the
ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go),
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in
(7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver
*IF EQUIPPED
90
seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in
(22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition to the
ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At
this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy
Entry.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE
HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the
instrument panel and in front of the driverʼs
door.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled
(or later disabled) through the Uconnect®
system screen. Refer to “Customer- Programmable Features — Uconnect® Access
8.4 Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to
the left and lift the hood.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push
at the center of the hood to ensure that both
latches engage.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise. When
the headlight switch is on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights
are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
91
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic
headlight and fog light (if equipped)
lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass
and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching
the lenses and reducing light output,
avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove
road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
to the A (AUTO) position.
92
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the OFF position. To turn
the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the
headlights will turn on in the Automatic
Mode.
Headlights On Automatically With
Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable feature. When your headlights are in the automatic
mode and the engine is running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on. The
programmable settings are available in the in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “CustomerProgrammable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4
Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper System” and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the
wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute, and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And
Washers” in this section for further information.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will
automatically dim to the lower nighttime
intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this section for
further information.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The automatic high beam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital
camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror.
This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of
view.
NOTE:
• If the windshield or automatic high beam
mirror is replaced, the automatic high
beam mirror must be re-aimed to ensure
proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights
and taillights of vehicles in the field of
view will cause headlights to remain on
longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt,
film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll
box, etc.) on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity
Discharge Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased
illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or
rearward in car) to manually deactivate the
system (normal operation of low beams).
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System
is turned on, the headlights will initialize
by performing a brief sequence of rotations.
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once
again to reactivate the system.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
To Activate
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “CustomerProgrammable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4
Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers.
Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the
height of the headlight beam in reaction to
changes in vehicle pitch.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned
On or Off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with
a headlight delay that will leave the headlights
on for approximately 90 seconds. This delay is
initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while
the headlight switch is on, and then the head-
93
light switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
Interior Lights
The headlight delay time is programmable in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “CustomerProgrammable Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4
Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the
O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
94
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened, when the dimmer
control (rotating wheel on the right side of the
headlight switch) is rotated to the its farthest
upward position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open
and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down, to the OFF detent,
will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it
allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s
battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting
can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control
up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness
of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest
position up until you hear a click. This feature is
termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Battery Saver
Front Map/Reading Lights
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the
overhead console.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the
way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes,
the interior lights will automatically turn off.
Dimmer Control
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a
chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
cycled OFF, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are
turned on and left on for eight minutes while the
ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON.
95
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch
on either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, press the switch a second time. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is pressed.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights
off, press the lens a second time.
96
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
Turn Signals
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor and center
console area.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster
flash to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights.
Multifunction Lever
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it
would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel. This will cause the
high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is
released.
Windshield Wiper Operation
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high
beam. Pulling the multifunction back toward the
steering wheel will turn the low beams back on,
or shut the high beams off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side
of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth
detent for low wiper operation and the sixth
detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
97
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one
second (fourth detent).
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the
end of the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the lever downward to
the Mist position and release for a single wiping
cycle.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
98
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the
washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will
be sprayed on the windshield. The wash
function must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper
switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
Mist Control
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. The feature is especially useful for road
splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of five settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should
be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1
and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water
is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing
wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing
performance.
• A customer programmable feature in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) allows the Rain Sensing feature to
be turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not
operate under the following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the
ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position —
When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever
is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
99
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING
STEERING COLUMN — IF
EQUIPPED
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
100
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is
located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or
down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the lever toward you or
push the lever away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory
switch on the driver’s door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this section for further
information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the
“Heated Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated
steering wheel. Press the “Heated Wheel” softkey a second time to turn the heated steering
wheel off.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off.
The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is
already warm.
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Controls Soft-Key
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start. Refer to
“Remote Starting System — If Equipped” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
101
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or steering wheel covers of any
type and material. This may cause the
steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED
CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control
takes over accelerator operations at speeds
greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
102
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. CRUISE CONTROL
READY will appear on the instrument cluster to
indicate the electronic speed control is on. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the
electronic speed control is off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Electronic Speed Control System has been
designed to shut down if multiple Speed
Control functions are operated at the same
time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set
speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave
the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicating
what speed was set. An indicator CRUISE will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
To Deactivate
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing and holding the SET + button. If the
button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments until the button is released. The increase
in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control is set, push the SET (-)
button. If the button is continually held in the
SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release
the button when the desired speed is reached,
and the new set speed will be established.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button. If the button is continually
pressed, the set speed will continue to increase
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the
button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments until the button is released. The decrease
in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Electronic Speed Control.
103
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous
where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast
for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Electronic
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) — IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed
set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set
speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the
speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
104
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and
weather conditions into account, and
may be limited upon adverse sight
distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of
the vehicle’s braking capability, and
will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for
cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be
aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC
system.
(Continued)
105
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed
is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE
CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
• When the brakes are overheated.
To Activate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the
EVIC displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is turned on and in the
READY state, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in
PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
106
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET + button or the SET - button and
release. The EVIC will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is
Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close
proximity.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the EVIC.
• The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
NOTE:
If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS
off, ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
• You push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button.
• You push the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control ON/OFF button.
107
• You turn OFF the ignition.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE:
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set
speed by pressing the SET + button.
To Resume
Pressing the SET + button once will result in a
1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
• When you override and push the SET +
button or SET - button, the new speed
vehicle is traveling will secure the new set
speed.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE:
You can resume ACC from a minimum of
19 mph (30 km/h).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
108
If the SET + button is continually pressed, the
set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
(5 km/h) increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
EVIC display.
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET - button.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a
1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
If the SET - button is continually pressed, the
set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
(10 km/h) increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system can only apply limited
braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving up hill and down hill. However, a
slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
up hill and down hill, the ACC system will
cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance
setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates
and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, press the
Distance Setting —Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the
distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, press the
Distance Setting —Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the EVIC
displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon,
109
and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below
15 mph (24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages itself.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the
brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
110
Brake Alert
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following
a target vehicle, the system will provide an
additional acceleration to assist in passing ve-
hicles in front. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the
left hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left
hand drive traffic to a location with right hand
drive traffic, the ACC system will automatically
detect traffic direction. In this condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right
side of the Target vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the
right turn signal. In this condition the ACC
system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on
the left side until it determines that the vehicle
has moved back to a location with left hand
drive traffic.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system
settings. The EVIC is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the
EVIC:
The ACC screen will display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will continue to
display in the lower right hand corner of the
cluster.
• Distance Setting Change
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the EVIC will display “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects
in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” warning is active Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
111
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it
is important to note the following maintenance
items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
112
NOTE:
• If the “ACC / FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the
grille is not recommended. Doing so may
block the sensor and inhibit ACC / FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow
or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the EVIC will display “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in highly reflective areas
(i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC / FCW system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC / FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” message occurs
frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
Removing ACC Sensor For Off-Roading
NOTE:
When off-roading, it may be advisable to
remove the ACC sensor. The sensor is located behind the front lower grille in the
center of the vehicle. After removing the
lower fascia, you may remove the lower
sensor and bracket assembly.
To remove the sensor follow these instructions:
1. Unplug the connector by depressing the two
tabs on the connector and pulling it out. Do not
pull by the wiring or use any tools to remove the
connector.
2. Remove the wiring christmas tree attachment from the back of the bracket.
3. Remove the two M6 fasteners that connect
the bracket to the bumper.
NOTE:
Do not change the adjustment fasteners or
pull the sensor off of the bracket. Doing so
may misalign the sensor.
Store the sensor and bracket assembly in a
safe location. The wiring and connector must be
stowed properly after the sensor and bracket
assembly is removed.
A connector plug is stowed on top of the bumper
beam. Insert the wiring connector into the connector plug.
NOTE:
When the sensor is removed, Adaptive
Cruise Control, Normal Cruise Control, and
Forward Collision Warning will not be available and the forward collision warning On/
Off button will stay illuminated. Once the
vehicles ignition has been cycled the system will re-set and resume to full functionality.
To reinstall the sensor and bracket assembly
reverse the process above. The fastener torque
required to assembly the bracket back to the
beam is 6.6 ft lbs (9 N·m).
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC
again later, following a key cycle. If the problem
persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE:
Towing a trailer is not advised when using
ACC.
113
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original Set
Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be
limited.
114
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In
the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected
the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect
the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC system
to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle
until it is completely in the lane. There may not
be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar
Systems
Classification Specifications:
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Nor115
mal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the
vehicle speed is above 19 mph (30 km/h).
To change between the different cruise control
modes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns the
ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL (Fixed
Speed) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF button will
result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
116
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM will appear indicating
what speed was set. An indicator CRUISE will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button. If the button is continually
pressed, the set speed will continue to increase
until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing and holding the SET + button. If the
button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments until the button is released. The increase
in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
To decrease speed while the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control is set, push the SET (-)
button. If the button is continually held in the
SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release
the button when the desired speed is reached,
and the new set speed will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
While the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the
button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph (5 km/h) increments until the button is released. The decrease
in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
• You push the Normal Fixed Speed ON/OFF
button.
• You press the CANCEL button.
• You turn off the ignition.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
• The shift lever is removed from the Drive
position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING
(FCW) WITH MITIGATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the EVIC),
and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings and limited braking are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate
the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided
with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver
does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of autonomous braking
to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the
system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system
will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
117
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is
5 mph (10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
118
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “On”, this
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off”
prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory
from one key cycle to the next. If the system
is turned OFF, it will remain off when the
vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect® 8.4/8.4A System
Screen — if equipped.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward
collision button once to turn the system OFF
(led turns on).
NOTE:
The settings can only be changed when the
vehicle is in PARK.
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the
forward collision button again to turn the system
ON (led turns off).
Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active
Braking:
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the
bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the first “FWD Collision W...” soft-key.
NOTE:
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” softkey.
5. Press the “FWD Collision Warning” Far or
Near soft-key for your desired preference. Then
press the back arrow.
• The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
6. Press the second “FWD Collision W...” softkey.
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects
such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the car,
stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rate of speed.
4. Press the “FWD Collision Warning”, Far or
Near soft-key for your desired preference.
5. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
NOTE:
A check mark will appear in the selection
box to indicate the setting.
To change the FCW and Active Braking settings with Uconnect® 5.0 System Screen —
if equipped.
NOTE:
The settings can only be changed when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Follow these steps to set the FCW and Active
Braking:
1. Press the “+ MORE” hard-key located on the
lower right side of the Uconnect® system.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key.
7. Press the “Active Braking” On or Off soft-key.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting
and the Active Braking is the “On” setting, this
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away and it applies limited
braking. This gives you the most reaction time
to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are much closer. This setting provides less
reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/
FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions,
the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
119
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays:
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift
lever is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled
120
at this shift lever position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
tings” (if available) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located
within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicate
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will
display the park assist ready system status.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section
of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or from the Uconnect® System (if available). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” or "Uconnect® Set-
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
Continuous Tone
Fast Tone
121
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow
Fast
Continuous
Arc
None
4th Solid
3rd
Solid
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an
audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense® switch.
122
When the ParkSense® switch is
pressed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
switch is pressed, and the system requires
service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System
When the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for
five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC
will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition.
If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
• When you move the shift lever to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense® is
turned OFF, the EVIC will display “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the
volume of the radio when it is sounding a
tone.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
ParkSense® System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense® system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off,
it remains off until you turn it on again, even
if you cycle the ignition key.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage
them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system
not working properly. The ParkSense®
system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the
ParkSense® system OFF if objects such
as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
123
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in
the EVIC .
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,
ParkSense® should be disabled when the
tailgate is in the lowered or open position
and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered
tailgate could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense®. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
(Continued)
124
WARNING! (Continued)
and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer
to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for
limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift
lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense®
is enabled at one of these shift lever positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Warning Display
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
ParkSense® Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
or from the Uconnect® System (if equipped).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” or "Uconnect® Settings” (if
equipped) in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located
within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicate
the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
125
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to
fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
EVIC display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Fast Tone
126
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance (in/cm)
Greater than 79 in
(200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than 47 in
(120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime)
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
Slow (for rear only)
Fast
Continuous
Arcs
None
4th Solid
3rd Solid
2nd Flashing
1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the
radio, if on, when the system is sounding an
audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the
EVIC.
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System
— if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume
setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is
pressed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
127
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
switch is pressed, and the system requires
service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist
System
When the ParkSense® System has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition with the front sensors, the EVIC will
display "UNAVAILABLE" at the front sensor loca128
tion of the car graphic. The system will continue to
provide arc alerts at the rear sensor location.
When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a faulted condition with
the rear sensors, the EVIC will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the EVIC,
see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense® system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense® is
turned off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the
volume of the radio when it is sounding a
tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage
them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system
not working properly. The ParkSense®
system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the
ParkSense® system off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result
in the system misinterpreting a close ob-
ject as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,
ParkSense® should be disabled when the
tailgate is in the lowered or open position.
A lowered tailgate could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might
be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are
in close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense® in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
It is recommended that the driver looks
over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense®. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
129
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle
than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
Zone
130
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP
CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®
Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned ON), The rear view
image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 MPH, the transmission is shifted into
"PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
Active guide lines are overlaid on the image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle while a dashed centerline will indicate the center of the vehicle to
assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView® Rear Back
Up Camera. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView®
should only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView® camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView® to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView®.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off —
With Uconnect® 5.0
1. Turn the Radio on.
NOTE:
A check mark will appear in the selection
box to indicate the system is turned ON.
Turning ParkView® On Or Off —
With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the
bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” softkey.
4. Press the “Parkview Backup camera” softkey to turn the ParkView® system ON or OFF.
NOTE:
A check mark will appear in the selection
box to indicate the system is turned ON.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Assistance” soft-key.
4. Press the check box soft key next to
“Parkview® Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
131
POWER SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
132
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not leave the key in the
ignition switch (or leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch
rearward to full open. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch
in the forward position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunroof
will remain in a partially closed condition until
the switch is pushed and held forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as
the sunroof opens.
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
The power sunroof switches remain active for
up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Ignition OFF Operation
133
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located
to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof and Power Shade
Switches
134
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not leave the key in the
ignition switch (or leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/Run position).
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an open
sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt
properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop
automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch
rearward to full open. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition
until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch
in the forward position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunroof
will remain in a partially closed condition until
the switch is pushed and held forward again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it
within one-half second and the shade will open
automatically from any position. The shade will
open and stop automatically at the half-open
position. Press the shade switch rearward again
and release it within one-half second and the
shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual
Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch
rearward. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Press and
hold the shade switch rearward again and the
shade will open automatically to the full-open
position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed
and held rearward again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed the shade will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to
the half-open position. Pressing the shade
close button again will automatically close
both the sunroof and shade completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual
Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in
the forward position. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement and the shade will
remain in a partially closed condition until the
switch is pushed and held forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft
cloth to clean the glass panel.
135
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switches can be programmed
to remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure
that the sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER
OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets
are labeled with either a “key” or a “battery”
symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered
136
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward on the storage lid to
open the compartment and gain access to this
power outlet.
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets should be removed
or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation,
a MOPAR® knob and element must be
used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also
a power outlet located in the storage area of the
center console.
NOTE:
The rear power outlet can be switched to
“battery” powered all the time by switching
the power outlet right rear quarter panel fuse
in the fuse panel.
Center Console Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet
Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
Rear Power Outlet
137
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type
of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
138
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not
being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the rear seat
passengers located in the fold-down center
armrest.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door
panels for easy access.
Rear Cupholders
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull outward
on the latch and lower the glove box door.
Door Panel Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right
side of the instrument panel.
Opened Glove Compartment
139
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD
player located in the center console.
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to
access the lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the lid.
Lower Storage Compartment
140
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player-If
Equipped
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Cellular
phones, music players, and other handheld
electronic devices should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices while driving can
cause an accident due to distraction, resulting
in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once
for high, twice for low, and a third time to return
to off.
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the
left side of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps
out of the bezel when needed. The flashlight
features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer, the passenger side cargo area will
not be available.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Three-Press Switch
Cargo Storage Bins
Rear Storage Bin
There are four removable storage bins located
in the rear cargo area. There are two storage
bins located on either side of the cargo area.
Press And Release
141
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Two additional storage bins are located under
the load floor. To access the lower storage bins,
raise the load floor and attach the tether hook
(attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the
liftgate opening.
Lower Storage Bins
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped
Tether Strap
NOTE:
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not
to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo
from shifting or protect passengers from
loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it
over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into
the slots in the pillar trim cover.
142
Rear Cargo Cover
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a
sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its
mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo
area floor, should be used to safely secure
loads when the vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a
sudden stop or accident, a hook could pull
loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile
in a sudden stop or accident.
(Continued)
143
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rotating the center portion upward
once more will activate the washer
pump which will continue to operate as
long as the switch is held. Upon release of the switch, the wipers will resume the
continuous rear wiper operation. When this
rotary control is in the OFF position, rotating it
downward will activate the rear washer pump
which will continue to operate as long as the
switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will
cycle several times before returning to the
parked position.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop
if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is released the pump
will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
144
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return
to the “park” position.
If the flipper glass is open, the rear window
wiper/washer functionality is interrupted and the
wiper stops at that “park” position. When the
flipper glass is closed, the rear wiper will resume wiper/washer functionality after five seconds.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is
located on the climate control panel.
Press this button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE:
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the
rear window defroster only when the engine
is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR®
crossbars built specifically for this roof rack
system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments,
located at the upper edge of each crossbar,
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft
wrench provided with the MOPAR® crossbars.
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack
frame. Once the crossbar is in the desired
position, retighten the with the wrench to lock
the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, place the front
and rear crossbars approximately 24 in
(61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the
front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar over
the satellite radio antenna.
• The grab handles on the back of the
vehicle (if equipped) are not to be used as
a towing feature.
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
145
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars installed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards,
or loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
(Continued)
146
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy
loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can
fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds,
resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
•
•
•
•
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . .
• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays . . .
• Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Messages . .
• EVIC Amber Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EVIC Green Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Soft-Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0 Settings
• Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4 Settings
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.149
.150
.151
.156
.157
.158
.159
.160
.161
.162
.162
.165
.166
.166
.166
.166
.179
147
• Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .
• iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . .
• STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED
• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . .
• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .
• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.190
.191
.191
.191
.191
.192
.192
.192
.193
.196
.197
.198
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub)
9 — ESC Button
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Hood Release
12 — Fuel Door Release
13 — Headlight Switch
14 — Dimmer Control
149
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
150
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of
the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the BRAKE warning light is not on.
When the ignition switch is first turned
to the ON/RUN position, this light will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if
the driver or front passenger seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light will
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light
does not turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will
turn on when the ignition switch is
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high
beam.
This indicator will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
6. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable
information such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” of your owners manual for more
information.
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior
turn signals when the turn signal lever
is operated. A tone will chime, and an
EVIC message will appear if either turn signal is
left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE:
If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate,
check for a defective outside light bulb.
8. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed. >
NOTE:
A chime will sound once if the vehicle exceeds 120 km/h (75 mph).
151
9. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable
information such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” of your owners manual for more
information.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the
key is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally
and will not require towing.
152
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to
the engine control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or
park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
11. Electronic Park Brake Failure Indicator
— If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic
Parking Brake system requires
service.
12. Engine Temperature Indicator
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise
and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge
to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until
the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your
Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” of your owners manual for more information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by
steam or boiling coolant. You may want to
call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
13. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low,
or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during
sharp cornering maneuvers, which change
fluid level conditions. The vehicle should
have service performed, and the brake fluid
level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), are also equipped with Elec153
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake
is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application.
14. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located. The pointer
shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
154
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from
a can or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the
sensors may result.
16. Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display/Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center” of your owners
manual for more information.
17. Selectable EVIC Menu
This area of the cluster will display the EVIC
selectable menu. For further information, refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
— If Equipped” of your owners manual for more
information.
18. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If
the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” of your owners manual for further
information.
19. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle theft alarm is arming. The
light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set.
The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with
155
the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN.
22. Park/Headlight
Equipped
ON
Indicator
—
This indicator will illuminate when
the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
This system allows the driver to select a variety
of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Main Gauge
• MPH to km/h
• Vehicle Info
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)
• Terrain — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that
is located in the instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Trip
• Audio
• Stored Messages
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN,
the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
• Diagnostic Codes
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Location
156
If
The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward
through the main menu and submenus (Main Gauge, MPH/km/h,
Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver Assist,
Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
EVIC Buttons
• UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow
button to scroll upward through the
main menu and submenus (Main
Gauge, MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,
Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, Screen
Set Up).
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to access the information screens or sub-menu screens
of a main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Press and release the LEFT arrow
button to access the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Press the OK button to access/select the information screens or sub-menu screens of a main
menu item. Press and hold the OK arrow button
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Displays
The EVIC displays are located in the center
portion of the cluster and consists of eight
sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display
will illuminate in grey under normal conditions,
yellow for non critical warnings, red for critical
warnings and white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu
Information — Whenever there are sub-menus
available, the position within the sub-menus is
shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp,
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
7. Air Suspension Status
157
8. 4WD Status
• Unstored Messages
9. Selectable Gauge 2
This message type is displayed indefinitely or
until the condition that activated the message is
cleared. Examples of this message type are
“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and
“Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
10. Selectable Gauge 1
The main display area will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature
of the main menu. The main display area also
displays “pop up” messages that consist of
approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns to
the previous screen. Most of the messages of
this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
As long as there is a stored message, an “i” will
be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside
temp line. Examples of this message type are
“Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low
Tire Pressure”.
158
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state.
Examples of this message type are “Remote
Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns to
the previous screen. An example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams On”.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display
for approximately 10 seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position or cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position if equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to
the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless
Enter-N-Go™
• Traction Control Off
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Washer Fluid Low
• Lights On
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/ RUN position (Do not start
the engine.)
• Oil Pressure Low
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Oil Change Due
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Fuel Low
• Turn Signal On
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Vehicle Not in Park
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Key in Ignition
• Service Power Steering
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Cruise Off
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Cruise Ready
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to XX”
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat
this procedure.
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Messages
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Brake Fluid Low
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Service Airbag System
• Battery Voltage Low
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
159
• Door Open
• Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Doors Open
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Liftgate Open
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided
into the white telltales area on the right, amber
telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the
left.
• Gear Not Available
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Shift Not Allowed
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
EVIC Amber Telltales
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
• Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service
Req.
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride
Height
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down
Please Wait
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to
Cool
• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Service Transmission
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
• Service Shifter
• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For
jacking And Tire Change
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Washer Fluid Low
• Service Air Suspension System
160
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride
Height
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will
turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate
the windshield washer fluid is low.
• Transmission Temperature Warning
Telltale
This telltale indicates that the
transmission fluid temperature is
running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale turns on, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine
at idle or faster until the light turns off.
• Service Forward Collision Warming
This light warns the driver of a potential collision
with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver
to take action in order to avoid the collision. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle.”
• Service Adaptive Cruise Control
This light will turn on when a ACC
is not operating and needs service.
For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
• Electronic Park Brake Failure
This telltale indicates that there is
an Electronic Park Brake Fault.
Please see your authorized dealer
for assistance.
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales.
These telltales include:
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate
that one or more doors may be
ajar.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil
pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four
minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much
oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil
temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays
on or comes on while driving, turn off
some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with
the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
161
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. The light will come
on when the ignition is first turned
ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise
and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge
to pass H, the indicator will continuously flash
and a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped
and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable. However,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible. If the light is flashing when the engine
is running, immediate service is required. You
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing.
162
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
• Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If
Equipped
This telltale is on when the Electric
Power Steering is not operating
and needs service.
• Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate
that liftgate may be ajar.
EVIC Green Telltales
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green
when the electronic speed control
is SET. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in
“Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon
is highlighted in the EVIC.
Digital Speedometer
Press and release the UP or DOWN
arrow button until the Digital display
icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
Press and release the RIGHT arrow
button to scroll through the submenus and press the OK button to
change the display between km/h and mph.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Press the
LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll through
the information sub-menus and press the OK
button to select or reset the following resettable
sub-menus:
Air Suspension – If Equipped
Transmission Temperature – Automatic
Transmission Only
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow
button and one of the following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset. Press and release the LEFT
arrow button to return to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” under “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Trip A
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the Trip A
icon is highlighted in the EVIC
(Toggle left or right to select Trip A
or Trip B). The Trip A information
will display the following:
• Distance
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
163
Trip B
Stored Messages
Press and release the Left or Right
arrow button until the Trip B icon is
highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B).
The Trip B information will display
the following:
• Distance
Press and release the UP arrow
button until the Messages display
icon is highlighted in the EVIC. This
feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will
allow you to see what the stored messages are.
• Average Fuel Economy
Audio
• Elapsed Time
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the Audio
display icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to scroll
through the sub-menus and press
the OK button display the active source.
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the Fuel
Economy icon is highlighted.
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon
(MPG or L/100 km with Bargraph)
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
164
enter the Screen Setup sub-menu. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is
displayed.
Driver Assist
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the
Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
display the Adaptive Cruise Control
sub-menu. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Terrain
Screen Setup
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the
Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the Terrain display icon is highlighted in
the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the
Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension,
Drivetrain, Vehicle Pitch, Vehicle Roll, Vehicle
Altitude and Wheel Articulation.
Upper Left
Upper Right
• None
• None
Diagnostics — If Equipped
• Compass
• Compass (default setting)
Press and release the UP or
DOWN arrow button until the Diagnostics display icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the
diagnostic trouble codes and
descriptions.
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Outside Temp
• Current Gear: ON/OFF
• Time
• Current Gear
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Gear Display
• Average MPG
• Time
• Current MPG
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Trip A
Screen Setup Driver Selectable
Items
• Average MPG
• Trip B
Odometer
• Current MPG
• Standard (PRND) Gear Indicator
• Trip A
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings
To Default Settings)
• Single Character (D) Gear Indicator
• Trip B
• Cancel
• Okay
165
Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of
soft and hard keys located on the center of the
instrument panel that allows you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Your Uconnect® Access system may also have
a Screen Off and Back hard-keys located below
the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the
Uconnect® Access screen. Press the Screen
Off hard-key a second time to turn the screen
on.
Uconnect® 8.4 soft-keys and hard-keys
Uconnect® 5.0 soft-keys and hard-keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
Soft-Keys
Hard-Keys
Customer Programmable Features
— Uconnect® 5.0 Settings
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect®
Access system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control
knob located on the right side of the Climate
166
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect® Access system.
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect®
display.
Press the Settings hard-key to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect®
system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Audio
and Phone/Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to
enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode press and release the preferred setting
until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete either press the Back
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to
the previous menu or press the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select the Auto or
Manual display settings. To change Mode status, touch and release the Auto or Manual
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall
screen brightness with the headlights on. Adjust
the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys
or by selecting any point on the scale between
the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall
screen brightness with the headlights off. Adjust
the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys
or by selecting any point on the scale between
the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of
multiple languages (Deutsche / English / Español / Français / Italiano / Nederlands / Polski /
Português / Türkçe) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language soft-key, then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears
next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) changed between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice
Response Length, touch the Brief or Detailed
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
167
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Never
/ w/Help or Always display the Teleprompter
with possible options while in a voice session.
To change the Show Command List, touch the
Never / w/Help or Always soft-key until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
the sound heard when a touch screen button
(soft-key) is pressed. Touch the Touchscreen
Beep soft-key until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
168
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn
directions will appear in the display as the
vehicle approaches a designated turn within a
programmed route. To make your selection,
touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Time and Format
When in this display, you may set the time and
choose the format to display the time. Touch the
12h / 24h / AM and/or PM soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. If 24h is selected, AM/PM soft-keys will
be greyed out (unavailable).
• Sync Date
When in this display, you may choose to set the
date automatically. Touch the Sync Date softkey until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date
manually. Touch the Set Date soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Safety / Assistance
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Front Collision Sensitivity- If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To
change the setting for more dynamic driving,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to
the vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW
status, touch and release the Near or Far
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) - Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake
Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the
ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to
avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA
system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To
make your selection, touch the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation - Active
Braking soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission shift
lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is
less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an
alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
To change the ParkSense® status, touch and
release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
and operating information.
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings
can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®
System — if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To
make your selection, touch the ParkSense®
Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings
can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®
System — if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To
make your selection, touch the ParkSense®
Rear Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
When this feature is selected, the park assist
system will detect objects located behind the
vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop
169
the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the
ParkSense® Park Assist Braking soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
information.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If
Equipped
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the
distance at which the steering wheel will provide
feedback for potential lane departures. The
LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an
early, medium or late warning zone start point.
To make your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
170
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength
— If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the
strength of the steering wheel feedback for
potential lane departures. The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to
the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High.
To make your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior
sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the
ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The
mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Paddle Shifting
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel paddle switches for shifting in manual
mode. To make your selection, touch the Paddle
Shifting soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot
Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in
“Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated
and will only show a visual alert in the exterior
mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When
“Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot
Alert status, touch the Off, Lights or Lights &
Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage
in the area where the sensor is located, even
if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may
have become misaligned. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating
to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows
you to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift
lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate. To make
your selection, touch the ParkView® Backup
Camera soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active
Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. To make your selection, touch the
ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Static
Guidelines that allows you to see straight grid
line overlay over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. To make your selection, touch
the ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Fixed
Guidelines that allows you to see Fixed Guidelines over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. To make your selection, touch
the ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide171
lines soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera
Delay press the “Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” soft-key to turn the ParkView®
Delay ON or OFF.
172
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will
automatically activate the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield. To make
your selection, touch the Rain Sensing soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating
information. To make your selection, touch the
Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Brake Service
This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is in
motion. When this feature is selected, it will
allow the service of the rear brake components.
To make your selection touch the Brake Service
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto Park Brake (automatic vehicles)
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will
automatically set the Park Brake when the
vehicle is shifted to park. To make your selection, touch the Auto Park Brake soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Auto Park Brake (manual vehicles)
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will
automatically set the Park Brake at key off. To
make your selection, touch the Auto Park Brake
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Hold ʼn Go *
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will
automatically hold its position when it comes to
a stop To make your selection, touch the Hold ʼn
Go soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Interior Ambient Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the brightness of the interior
ambient lighting. To change the Interior Ambient
Lights setting, touch the + or - soft-key to select
your desired Interior Ambient Light level. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off. To change
*IF EQUIPPED
the Headlights Off Delay setting, touch the
Headlights Off Delay soft-key, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. A
check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90
seconds when the doors are unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To
change the Illuminated Approach status, touch
the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return
to the previous menu.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the
wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they
were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will activate/deactivate automatically
under certain conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
turn on whenever the engine is running. To
make your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
173
• Adaptive Front Lighting *
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
turn relative to a change in the direction of the
steering wheel. To make your selection, touch
the Adaptive Front Lighting soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Headlight Dip *
Select this feature when driving on the opposite
side of road to lower headlights. To make your
selection, touch the Headlight Dip soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, touch the Flash Head174
*IF EQUIPPED
lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the
following settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driverʼs door is opened. To make
your selection, touch the Auto Unlock On Exit
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will
sound when the door locks are activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn
With Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will
sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn
With Remote Start soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the driverʼs door will unlock on the
first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passengerʼs doors. When Unlock All
Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door
handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If driver door first
is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be
used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or
unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the
doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
To make your selection, touch the Passive Entry
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NGo™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
NOTE:
The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key
Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Power Lift Gate Alert
This feature plays an alert when the power lift
gate is raising or lowering. . To make your
selection, touch the Power Lift Gate Alert softkey until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote
Start soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s
heated seat and heated steering wheel will
automatically turn ON when temperatures are
below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Heated Seats soft-key, then select either Off,
175
Remote Start or All Starts until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),
power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0
seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch
176
the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return
to the previous menu.
Compass Setting – If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should
be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,
per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE:
Keep magnetic materials away from the top
of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s,
Mobile Phones, Laptop Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may
give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this
setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which
eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass
may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON softkey and completing one or more 360-degree
turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will
now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass,
Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with
the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – softkeys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE:
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide
your finger up or down to change the setting
as well as touch directly on the desired
setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume
relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 softkey. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Surround Sound
• Paired Devices
This feature provides simulated surround sound
mode. To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound soft-key, select On or Off followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
This feature shows which phones are paired to
the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement
Manual.
• AUX Volume Match
Air Suspension – If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension soft-key the following settings will be available:
This feature provides the ability to tune the
audio level for portable devices connected
through the AUX input. To make your selection,
touch the AUX Volume Match soft-key, select
On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
• Loudness — If Equipped
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle
is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at
last ignition off. To make your selection, touch
the Loudness soft-key, select On or Off followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when
vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit. Touch
the box next to your selection and a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system
has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
• Suspension Display Messages
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension
Alerts will be displayed. When Warnings Only is
selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will
be displayed.
177
• Tire Jack Mode
When this feature is selected the air suspension
system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of
the suspension, while the vehicle is on a jack
changing a tire. Touch the box next to your
selection and a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Radio Setup
After pressing the Radio Setup soft-key the
following settings will be available.
• Traffic Announcement *
• Transport Mode
When this feature is selected it allows the
system to pause receivers and media to issue a
traffic bulletin. To change the Traffic Announcement setting touch the Off or On soft-key. A
check mark will appear in the box when selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
When this feature is selected the air suspension
system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Touch the box next to your selection and a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the checkmark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
• Alternative Frequency
• Wheel Alignment Mode
When this feature is selected it allows the
frequency to change automatically to maintain
the strongest signal To change the Alternative
Frequency setting touch the Off or On soft-key.
A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Regional
This feature prevents auto leveling of the air
suspension while performing a wheel alignment
service. Before performing a wheel alignment
this mode must be enabled. Refer to your
authorized dealer for further information.
178
*IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is selected it forces regional
service-following enabling automatic switching
to network stations. To change the Regional
setting touch the Off or On soft-key. A check
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings soft-key the
following settings will be available.
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their
default. To restore the settings to their default
setting touch the Yes or No soft-key. A check
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove
personal data including Bluetooth® devices and
presets. To Clear Personal Data touch the Yes
or No soft-key. A check mark will appear in the
box when selected. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
Customer Programmable Features
— Uconnect® 8.4 Settings *
Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings
soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to
access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
Compass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
When making a selection, press the soft-key to
enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode press and release the preferred setting
until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete either press the Back
Arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to
the previous menu or press the X soft-key to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
*IF EQUIPPED
Display
After pressing the Display soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the
auto display settings. To change Mode status,
touch and release the Day, Night or Auto softkey. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the +
and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the +
and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of
three languages for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation
system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language
soft-key and then touch the desired language
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return
to the previous menu.
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) changed between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice
Response Length settings. To change the Voice
Response Length, touch the Brief or Detailed
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
179
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Touchscreen Beep
• Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
the sound heard when a touch screen button
(soft-key) is pressed. Touch the Touchscreen
Beep soft-key until a check-mark appears next
to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may automatically
have the radio set the time. To change the Sync
Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If
Equipped
• Set Time Hours
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn
directions will appear in the display as the
vehicle approaches a designated turn within a
programmed route. To make your selection,
touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
180
When in this display, you may adjust the hours.
The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be
unchecked. To make your selection touch the +
or - soft-keys to adjust the hours up or down.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu or touch the X soft-key to close
out of the settings screen.
• Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be
unchecked. To make your selection touch the +
or - soft-keys to adjust the minutes up or down.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu or touch the X soft-key to close
out of the settings screen.
• Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time
format display setting. Touch the Time Format
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
12hrs or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Safety / Assistance
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Front Collision Sensitivity- If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To
change the setting for more dynamic driving,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to
the vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW
status, touch and release the Near or Far
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) - Active Braking *
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake
Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, the
ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to
avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA
system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To
make your selection, touch the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation - Active
Braking soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle
*IF EQUIPPED
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If
Equipped
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the
distance at which the steering wheel will provide
feedback for potential lane departures. The
LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an
early, medium or late warning zone start point.
To make your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength
— If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the
strength of the steering wheel feedback for
potential lane departures. The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to
the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High.
To make your selection, touch the Lane Departure Warning soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
• ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects
behind the vehicle when the transmission shift
lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is
less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an
alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
To change the ParkSense® status, touch and
release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
and operating information.
• Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings
can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®
System — if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To
make your selection, touch the ParkSense®
Front Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
181
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings
can be selected from the EVIC or Uconnect®
System — if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To
make your selection, touch the ParkSense®
Rear Chime Volume soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• ParkSense® Park Assist Braking
When this feature is selected, the park assist
system will detect objects located behind the
vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop
the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the
ParkSense® Park Assist Braking soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
182
*IF EQUIPPED
menu. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
information.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior
sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the
ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The
mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Paddle Shifting *
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel paddle switches for shifting in manual
mode. To make your selection, touch the Paddle
Shifting soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot
Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in
“Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated
and will only show a visual alert in the exterior
mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When
“Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot
Alert status, touch the Off, Lights or Lights &
Chime soft-key. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage
in the area where the sensor is located, even
if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may
have become misaligned. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating
to specification.
• ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows
you to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift
lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate. To make
your selection, touch the ParkView® Backup
Camera soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active
Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display
whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. To make your selection, touch the
ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Static
Guidelines that allows you to see straight grid
line overlay over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. To make your selection, touch
the ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Fixed
Guidelines that allows you to see Fixed Guidelines over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. To make your selection, touch
the ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guide183
lines soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the
forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera
Delay press the “Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” soft-key to turn the ParkView®
Delay ON or OFF.
184
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will
automatically activate the windshield wipers if it
senses moisture on the windshield. To make
your selection, touch the Rain Sensing soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating
information. To make your selection, touch the
Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Brake Service
This feature will be grayed out while vehicle is in
motion. When this feature is selected, it will
allow the service of the rear brake components.
To make your selection touch the Brake Service
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto Park Brake
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will
automatically set the Park Brake when the
vehicle is shifted to park. To make your selection, touch the Auto Park Brake soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Hold ’n Go
When this feature is selected, the vehicle will
automatically hold its position when it comes to
a stop To make your selection, touch the Hold ’n
Go soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Interior Ambient Lights
When this feature is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the brightness of the interior
ambient lighting. To change the Interior Ambient
Lights setting, touch the + or - soft-key to select
your desired Interior Ambient Light level. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the
adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off. To change
the Headlights Off Delay setting, touch the
Headlights Off Delay soft-key, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. A
check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90
seconds when the doors are unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To
change the Illuminated Approach status, touch
the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return
to the previous menu.
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Lights / SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the
wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they
were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
turn on whenever the engine is running. To
make your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeam™” — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam
headlights will activate/deactivate automatically
under certain conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
• Adaptive Front Lighting
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
turn relative to a change in the direction of the
steering wheel. To make your selection, touch
the Adaptive Front Lighting soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
185
• Headlight Dip
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Select this feature when driving on the opposite
side of road to lower headlights. To make your
selection, touch the Headlight Dip soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating
that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make
your selection, touch the Auto Unlock On Exit
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the horn will
sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn
With Remote Start soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the
first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter UNLOCK button. When 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All
Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without
the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the
following settings will be available.
186
When this feature is selected, the horn will
sound when the door locks are activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn
With Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
NOTE:
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door
handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s
door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If driver door first
is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be
used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or
unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch
the Passive Entry soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Memory To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
NOTE:
The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key
Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote
Start soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will
sound when the remote start is activated. To
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn
With Remote Start soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow softkey to return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s
heated seat and heated steering wheel will
automatically turn ON when temperatures are
below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn ON. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Heated Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
187
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),
power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0
seconds, 45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch
the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return
to the previous menu.
188
Compass Setting – If Equipped
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should
be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven,
per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE:
Keep magnetic materials away from the top
of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s,
Mobile Phones, Laptop Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may
give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this
setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which
eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass
may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON
soft-key and completing one or more 360degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will
now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass,
Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with
the + and – setting soft-keys or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – softkeys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE:
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide
your finger up or down to change the setting
as well as touch directly on the desired
setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume
relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed
Adjusted Volume touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 softkey. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Surround Sound
• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This feature provides simulated surround sound
mode. To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound soft-key, select On or Off followed
by pressing the arrow back soft-key.
When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when
vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit. Touch
the box next to your selection and a check-mark
appears next to the feature showing the system
has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
• AUX Volume Match
This feature provides the ability to tune the
audio level for portable devices connected
through the AUX input. To make your selection,
touch the AUX Volume Match soft-key, select
On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back
soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® soft-key
the following settings will be available.
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to
the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement
Manual.
Air Suspension – If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension soft-key the following settings will be available:
• Suspension Display Messages
When All is selected, all the Air Suspension
Alerts will be displayed. When Warnings Only is
selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will
be displayed.
• Tire Jack Mode
When this feature is selected the air suspension
system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of
the suspension, while the vehicle is on a jack
changing a tire. Touch the box next to your
selection and a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
189
• Transport Mode
When this feature is selected the air suspension
system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Touch the box next to your selection and a
check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the checkmark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
• Wheel Alignment Mode
This feature prevents auto leveling of the air
suspension while performing a wheel alignment
service. Before performing a wheel alignment
this mode must be enabled. Refer to your
authorized dealer for further information.
Radio Setup
After pressing the Radio Setup soft-key the
following settings will be available.
• Traffic Announcement
When this feature is selected it allows the
system to pause receivers and media to issue a
traffic bulletin. To change the Traffic Announcement setting touch the Off or On soft-key. A
190
check mark will appear in the box when selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Alternative Frequency
When this feature is selected it allows the
frequency to change automatically to maintain
the strongest signal To change the Alternative
Frequency setting touch the Off or On soft-key.
A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Regional
When this feature is selected it forces regional
service-following enabling automatic switching
to network stations. To change the Regional
setting touch the Off or On soft-key. A check
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings soft-key the
following settings will be available.
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their
default. To restore the settings to their default
setting touch the Yes or No soft-key. A check
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove
personal data including Bluetooth® devices and
presets. To Clear Personal Data touch the Yes
or No soft-key. A check mark will appear in the
box when selected. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF
EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your radio refer
to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
the left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Located inside the center console upper lid, this
feature allows an iPod® or external USB device
to be plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,
5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod®
software versions may not fully support the
iPod® control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect®
Supplement Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pressing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a pushbutton in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/CD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a pushbutton in the center. The function of
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous
track if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays
the second track; three times, it will play the
third, etc.
191
The center button on the left side rocker switch
has no function for a single-disc CD player.
However, when a multiple-disc CD player is
equipped on the vehicle, the center button will
select the next available CD in the player.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching
the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a
soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid
scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
192
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures
may become too high.
NOTE:
If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e.,
scratched, reflective coating removed, a
hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player
service.
RADIO OPERATION AND
MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the
repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended
that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using
Uconnect® (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is
designed to make you comfortable in all types
of weather. This system can be operated
through either the Automatic Climate Controls
on the instrument panel or through the
Uconnect® system display.
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hardkeys And Soft-keys)
When the Uconnect® system is in different
modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the
driver and passenger temperature settings will
be indicated at the top of the display.
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting,
the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
General Overview
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys are
Uconnect® screen.
located
below
the
2. A/C Button
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
Press and release to change the current setting,
the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting,
the indicator illuminates when ON.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys
4. AUTO Operation Button
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect®
system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature
Controls — Soft-keys
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the
193
ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation”
for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this
function will cause the ATC to switch into
manual mode. The blower speed may increase
when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system
will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
194
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
ture bar towards the red arrow soft-key for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down
Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for
cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
9. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for
warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-key tempera-
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync
feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to
synchronize the passenger temperature setting
with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of
air forced through the climate system. There are
seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the
blower will cause automatic mode to switch to
manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
Hard-key
The blower speed increases as you turn the
control clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the knob counter-clockwise.
Soft-key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
11. Modes
floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort
conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and
side window demist outlets. This
mode works best in cold or snowy
conditions.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When the
defrost mode is selected, the blower level may
will increase.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted
so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
195
13. Driver Temperature Control Down
Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for cooler
temperature settings or on the touch-screen,
press and slide the soft-key temperature bar
towards the blue arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the hard-key button for
warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
196
15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into
the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
Moving the temperature bar into the blue area
indicates cooler temperatures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air
will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For
improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust
the blower and airflow mode settings. Also,
make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
• If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the
front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from behind the radiator and
through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The soft-key illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
cause MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke,
odors, or high humidity, or if rapid
cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pressing
the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Push the
button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
recirculation feature may be unavailable
(soft button greyed out). The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this
mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the
LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button
(4) on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature hard or soft control
buttons (7, 8, 13, 14). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by
simply allowing the system to function automatically.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/M
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation
The system allows for manual selection of
blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status
and recirculation control.
NOTE:
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed
speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan
will now operate at a fixed speed until additional
speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
The operator can also select the direction of the
airflow by selecting one of the available mode
settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual
operation.
197
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various
weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned
vehicles must be protected with a high-quality
antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
and 50% water is recommended. Refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter
months is not recommended because it may
cause window fogging.
198
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front
of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum,
they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly
removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to
maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a
problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy
or humid weather.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air
containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong
odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
NOTE:
Recirculate without A/C should not be used
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
199
200
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
• STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . .
• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . . .
• Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .
• FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quadra-Trac I® Operating Instructions/Precautions –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quadra-Trac II® Operating Instructions/Precautions –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Shift Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.205
.205
.206
.206
.207
.207
.208
.208
.209
.209
.209
.210
.215
. . . . . .215
. . . . . .215
. . . . . .216
. . . . . .216
201
• Quadra-Drive® II System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Messages
• QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Messages
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• When To Use 4WD LOW Range – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .
• Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 3.6L Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 5.7L Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY – IF EQUIPPED . .
• PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.219
.219
.219
.221
.221
.221
.223
.224
.224
.225
.225
.225
.226
.226
.227
.227
.227
.228
.228
.228
.229
.230
.230
.230
.232
.232
.232
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Brake Support – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — Four-Wheel Drive Models With
MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Select Speed Control (SSC) — Four-Wheel Drive Models With
MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case Only . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Run Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Spare Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.233
.233
.234
.235
.236
.237
.237
.237
.240
.242
.242
.242
.243
.244
.244
.244
.245
.245
.246
.247
.247
.247
.249
.249
203
• TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings . . . . . .
• SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TPMS Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 3.6L Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 5.7L Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .
• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) .
• Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . .
• Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . .
• Recreational Towing – Quadra–Trac II® /Quadra–Drive® II
Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.250
.251
.252
.253
.254
.254
.254
.256
.257
.258
.258
.259
.259
.261
.262
.263
.263
.266
.267
.267
.268
. . . . .268
STARTING PROCEDURES
Automatic Transmission
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
gear.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, and do not leave a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with
Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch
to the START position and release it as soon as
the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
205
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the
driver to operate the ignition switch with the
push of a button, as long
as the ENGINE START/
STOP button is installed
and the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
FOBIK is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter
will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
206
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If
the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC
(if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position,
or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or
RUN (engine not running) position and the
transmission is in PARK, the system will
automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch
Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four positions,
OFF, ACC, RUN and START. To change the
ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F
Or −29°C)
• Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
position:
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition switch to the ACC
position (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE
ACCESSORY”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch to
the RUN position (EVIC displays “IGNITION
MODE RUN”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition switch to the
OFF position (EVIC displays “IGNITION
MODE OFF”).
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather"
procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any
excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
207
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob
With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel:
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will disengage automatically
in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key
fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
(Continued)
208
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the engine can be turned off.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving
the vehicle without placing the transmission in
PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the
engine must be running and the brake pedal
must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve
the vehicle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Press the “eco” switch in
the center stack of the instrument panel and a
green light will indicate the ECO mode is engaged.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change
the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
• The torque converter clutch may engage at
lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
• The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
209
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
NOTE:
When Sport Mode is enabled, the vehicle’s
air suspension system will operate in
“Aero” Mode. Please refer to “Quadra Lift”
within this section for further information.
Eight–Speed Automatic
Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art,
fuel efficient eight-speed transmission. The
electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not
slide like a conventional shifter. Instead, the
shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward
and rearward, always returning to the center
position after each gear is selected. The transmission gear (PRND) is displayed both on the
shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select a gear range,
press the lock button on the shift lever and
move the lever rearward or forward. You must
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
210
stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges
at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), move the
lever past the first (or second) detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the
first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission shift lever provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT
shift positions. Once in the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between
SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do not
need to press the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes.
Manual shifts can be made using the shift
paddles mounted on the steering wheel. Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
the instrument cluster. Refer to "Paddle Shift
Mode" in this section for further information.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage
before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that
the transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when parked to
guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Make sure
the transmission is in PARK before leaving
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key
fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
(Continued)
211
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear
range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,
you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
shift lever could result.
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock
button on the shift lever and push the lever all
the way forward until it stops. When released, the lever will return to its home
position.
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it
indicates the PARK position.
212
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
using or a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C]
or below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
SPORT
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
heavy trailers), use the Paddle Shift switches
(refer to "Paddle Shift Mode" in this section) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions,
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To switch between DRIVE
and SPORT modes, tap the shift lever rearward.
SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE.
NOTE:
When Sport Mode is enabled, the vehicle’s
air suspension system will operate in
“Aero” Mode. Please refer to “Quadra Lift”
within this section for further information.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at
all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage
if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions,
and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not
re-engage after engine shutdown, perform
this procedure only in a desired location
(preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL
213
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
On vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, press
and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many
other situations.
5. Restart the engine.
Operation
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission
will return to normal operation.
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT
mode, it will operate automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To engage
Paddle Shift mode, simply tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-) while in
DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to
enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the current
gear. When Paddle Shift mode is active, the
current transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit your authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem
could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Paddle Shift Mode
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control,
giving you more control of the vehicle. Paddle
Shift allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
214
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift
up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by
the driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in
the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent
engine lugging) and will display the current
gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift
to first gear when coming to a stop. After a
stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range,
Snow mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) at a
stop will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will progressively downshift the transmission to the
lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
Quadra-Trac II® Operating
Instructions/Precautions – If
Equipped
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, Paddle Shift mode is not active.
Pressing the (+/-) shift paddles in SelecSpeed or Hill Descent Control simply limits
the highest allowed gear. Shifts below and
up to that gear will occur automatically.
Quadra-Trac I® Operating
Instructions/Precautions – If
Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode.
The Quadra-Trac II® transfer case provides
three mode positions:
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and
hold the (+) shift paddle until "D" or "S" is once
again displayed in the instrument cluster. You
can shift in or out of Paddle Shift mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
The Quadra-Trac I® is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient
full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction
is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC)
System, which combines standard ABS and
Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque
transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I® system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is
recommended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving
Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
• 4WD HI
• NEUTRAL
• 4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD
HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD
LOW position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The
4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed.
215
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to
the transfer case.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see
the information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice,
snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information on the various positions and their
intended usages.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
216
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. It provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain® – If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions
and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and press the “4WD LOW” button
once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD
LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will
begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift
is complete.
NEUTRAL, and press the “4WD LOW” button
once on the transfer case switch. The “4WD
LOW” indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or
a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow
Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N Press 4
Low” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position or
the engine running, shift the transmission into
• If shift conditions/interlocks are not met,
or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists, a “For 4x4 High
Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in N
Press 4 Low” message will flash from the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating
clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle
rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle
is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the
transfer case will not allow the shift.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without
first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages
both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the
engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
217
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for
four seconds. The light behind the N symbol will
blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEEL
DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL
(N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
218
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for
one second.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift
Procedure in Owners Manual” message will
flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be
met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button
or are no longer met during the shift, the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are
met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is
released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/
RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
Quadra-Drive® II System – If
Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive® II System features
two torque transfer couplings. The couplings
include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential
(ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II®
transfer case. The optional ELSD axle is fully
automatic and requires no driver input to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the unit
functions as a standard axle, balancing torque
evenly between left and right wheels. With a
traction difference between left and right
wheels, the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than
the other, torque will automatically transfer from
the wheel that has less traction, to the wheel
that has traction. While the transfer case and
axle coupling differ in design, their operation is
similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II® transfer
case shifting information, preceding this section, for shifting this system.
SELEC-TERRAIN™ — IF
EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Terrain™ combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
219
Selec-Terrain™ consists of the following positions:
• Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When
in Snow mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use
second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH) if the
transfer case is in high range. The level will
change to Off-Road 1 if the transfer case is in
Low range.
• Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to NRH.
220
• Sand – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set
to limit traction control management of
throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with air
suspension, the level will change to
Off-Road 1.
• Mud – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Off-Road 1.
• Rock – Off-road calibration only available in
4WD Low range. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for improved
ground clearance. Traction based tuning with
improved steer-ability for use on high traction
off-road surfaces. Activate the Hill Descent
Control for steep downhill control. Use for low
speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep
ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the
vehicle level will change to Off-Road 2. If the
Selec-Terrain™ switch is in ROCK mode,
and the transfer case is switched from 4WD
Low to 4WD High, the Selec-Terrain™ system will return to AUTO.
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the EVIC display. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
QUADRA-LIFT™ — IF
EQUIPPED
Description
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with
the benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the
push of a button.
Selec-Terrain™ Switch
1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer
Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer Selectable)
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the
standard position of the suspension and is
meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1.3 in (33 mm) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until
OR2 is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. Press the “Up” button
once from the NRH position while the vehicle
speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h). When in
the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and
50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph
(80 km/h), the vehicle will be automatically
lowered to NRH. Refer to “Off-Road Driving
Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately 2.6 in (65 mm) – This position
is intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, press the “Up” button twice from
the NRH position or once from the OR1
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height
will be automatically lowered to OR1. Refer
221
to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 0.5 in (13 mm) – This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering
the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically
enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed
remains between 62 mph (99 km/h) and
66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph
(106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH
from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains
between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph
(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
(48 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Mode,
regardless of vehicle speed if the shift lever is
in the “SPORT” position.
NOTE:
When ECO Mode is enabled the air suspension system lowers the vehicle to Aero
mode when the vehicle speed is between
52 mph (84 km/h) and 56 mph (90 km/h) for
20 seconds or goes above 56 mph (90 km/h).
222
The vehicle will exit Aero mode if the vehicle
speed remains between 20 mph (32 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h) for 20 seconds or if the
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1.5 in (38 mm) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, press the
“Down” button once from (NRH) while the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for
greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/
Exit Mode change will be cancelled. To exit
Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button once
while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/
Exit Mode can be enabled through the
Uconnect® Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature
is enabled, the vehicle will only lower if the
shift lever is in ⴖPARKⴖ, the terrain switch is in
ⴖAUTOⴖ, the transfer-case is in ⴖAUTO” and the
vehicle level should be either in Normal or
Aero Mode. The Vehicle will not automatically
lower if the air suspension level is in Off Rd 2
or Off Rd 1. If the vehicle is equipped with
Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will
be suppressed when the ignition is switched
Off and the Door is Open to prevent setting the
alarm Off.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based on
the position of the Selec-Terrain™ switch. The
height can be changed from the default SelecTerrain™ setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain™” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
The system requires that the engine be running
for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of
the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed.
If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed
until the open door(s) is closed.
The Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system uses
a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of
the vehicle will move up first and then the front.
When lowering the vehicle, the front will move
down first and then the rear.
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly,
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift™ air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer
to “Uconnect™ Access Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system. To
avoid personal injury or damage to the system, see your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle
into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic
load leveling system. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Air Suspension Modes
Wheel Alignment Mode
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Access
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
223
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the EVIC display. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a
system error has been detected.
Operation
The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which
the system is working to achieve. When raising,
if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the
224
“Up” button, the highest flashing indicator lamp
is the position the system is working to achieve.
When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing on the "Up" button the lowest solid indicator
lamp is the position the system is working to
achieve.
Pressing the “UP” button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the current
position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.
engine running, speed below threshold, etc).
The “UP” button can be pressed multiple times,
each press will raise the requested level by one
position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the
highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pressing the “DOWN” button once will move the
suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. engine running, doors closed, speed below
threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be
pressed multiple times. Each press will lower
the requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will
operate the same for automatic changes and
user requested changes.
• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 4, 5, and
6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR2.
• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4 and 5
will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR1.
• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4
will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this
position.
• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit
Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while
vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will
remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash
as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce
speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to, and
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp
4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash
until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which
point indicator lamp 3 will go solid. If during
the height change to Entry/Exit Mode, the
vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h),
the height change will be paused until the
vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the height change continues to
Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds 25 mph
(40 km/h) and the vehicle height will return to
NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be selected while
the vehicle is not moving provided that the
engine is still running and all doors remain
closed.
• Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
• Tire/Jack Mode - indicator lamps 3 and 6 will
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Tire/Jack Mode.
• Wheel Alignment Mode - indicator lamps 3
and 4 will be illuminated. Customer driving
will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
two-wheel drive vehicles any more than lowslung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover.
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is
attached to the lower front fascia with seven
quarter turn fasteners and can be removed
by hand. The front license plate bracket
must be removed first if equipped.
Front Air Dam
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The
vehicle height should then be raised as required
by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain™ switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the optimized height
based on the Selec-Terrain™ switch position.
The vehicle height can be changed from the
225
default height for each Selec-Terrain™ mode by
normal use of the air suspension switches.
Refer to “Quadra-Lift™ – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range – If
Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry
pavement; driveline damage may result.
4WD-LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement
will cause driveline binding and "crow-hop";
use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
226
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering
the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in
up to 20 inches (51 cm) of water, while
crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal performance of your vehicle’s
heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering, as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the
new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing water avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed
in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Maintenance
Hill Climbing
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to assure the
fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine
the conditions at the crest and/or on the
other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD
LOW for very steep hills.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “FourWheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain forward
motion. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery
roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion
while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to
come to a stop and immediately apply the
brakes. Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion,
or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
WARNING! (Continued)
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a
hill always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain forward motion by turning the front
wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite”
into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
(Continued)
227
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
228
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings,
and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle
in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check
the wheels for impacted material. Impacted
material can cause a wheel imbalance and
freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
3.6L Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrohydraulic power steering system that will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electro-hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing
power steering assist, then the system will
provide mechanical steering capability.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop
power steering assistance in order to prevent
damage to the system. Normal operation will
resume once the system is allowed to cool.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” message and a
flashing icon are displayed on the
EVIC screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the
dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
power steering assistance. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
TEMP” message and an icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. You will lose power
steering assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to
steer the vehicle. Under these conditions
there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• Increased noise levels at the end of the
steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a
problem with the power steering system.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.
5.7L Engine
The standard power steering system will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will provide mechanical steering capability if
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your
vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
power steering pump may make noise for
a short amount of time. This is due to the
cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
This noise should be considered normal,
and it does not in any way damage the
steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power
steering assist could pose a safety risk to
yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
229
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system
at the end of the steering wheel travel will
increase the steering fluid temperature and it
should be avoided when possible. Damage
to the power steering pump may occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a
defined service interval is not required. The fluid
should only be checked if a leak is suspected,
abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
230
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent
injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use
only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY
5.7L ENGINE ONLY – IF
EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine’s eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to
full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the
park brake pedal fully. To release the parking
brake, press the park brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
• This light only shows that the parking
brake is applied. It does not show the
degree of brake application.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the “Brake
Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed
is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when parked to
guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle. Never leave children alone in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
(Continued)
231
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE
CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
electronic brake control system that includes
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and
232
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of
these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Ready Alert Braking, Rain Brake Support and, if
it has four-wheel drive with the MP 3023 twospeed transfer case, Hill Descent Control
(HDC), Selec Speed Control (SSC).
WARNING! (Continued)
collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions.
The system controls hydraulic brake pressure
to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent
(Continued)
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limitedslip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature
remains active even if ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel
lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel
input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM
determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene
during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions, and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
233
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
234
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control
due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent collisions. The capabilities
of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The ESC system has two available operating
modes in 4WD HIGH range and two-wheel
drive vehicles, and one operating mode in 4WD
LOW range.
High Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in
4WD HIGH range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD
LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH
range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most
driving situations. ESC should only be turned to
“Partial Off” mode for specific reasons as noted
below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing
the “ESC OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off”
mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the
BLD feature described in the TCS section, has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. All other stability features of
ESC function normally. This mode is intended to
be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or
gravel conditions and more wheel spin than
ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily
press the “ESC OFF” switch. This will restore
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing
the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pressing the “ESC OFF”
switch. This may be done while the vehicle
is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off"
mode.
4WD Low Range
Partial Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in
4WD LOW range. Whenever the vehicle is
started in 4WD LOW range, or the transfer case
(if equipped) is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or
NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range, the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and
apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will
become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. No driver
action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all
trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When
TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
235
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver
when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill.
HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure
the driver applied for a short period of time after
the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal.
If the driver does not apply the throttle during
this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the
hill. The system will release brake pressure in
proportion to the amount of throttle applied as
the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
236
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE
gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward
gears when the activation criteria have been
met. The system will not activate if the vehicle is
placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e.,
less than 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer, when the system will not
activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle
or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a
grade when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, your trailer brakes may be
activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, when the brake pedal is
released, there may not be enough brake
pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on
a hill and this could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object behind you. In
order to avoid rolling down the hill while
resuming acceleration, manually activate
the trailer brake prior to releasing the
brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the
vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake, it
will roll down the hill and could cause a
collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brake
while parking on a hill, and that the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Uconnect® Access Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect® Access Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Ready Alert Braking – If Equipped
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of
brake pressure. This brake pressure will not be
noticed by the driver. The brake system uses
this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain
Brake Support is active, there is no notification
to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) —
Four-Wheel Drive Models With
MP3023 Two-Speed Transfer Case
Only
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph
Rain Brake Support – If Equipped
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically
apply a small amount of brake pressure to
remove any water buildup on the front brake
rotors. It only functions when the windshield
wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
ous driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Hill Descent Control Switch
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving
while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during vari-
• Parking brake is released
• Driver door is closed
237
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is
on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- paddle shifter input is
used for HDC target speed selection and will
put the transmission into ERS but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission
unless in Driver Override. During HDC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
Driver Override:
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time. While in
driver override the transmission will be in ERS
which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will
shift from 1st through the gear that is being
displayed.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set
speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
can be adjusted by using the paddle shifter. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
238
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver presses the HDC switch.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
Feedback to the driver:
The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a
HDC switch which has an LED which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver presses the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
deactivates due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
HDC Operation In 4WD Low Range
To enable HDC, press the HDC switch. The
HDC icon will be illuminated in the instrument
cluster and HDC will function. If the vehicle
speed goes above 20 mph (32 km/h), the HDC
icon will flash and HDC will not function. To
disable HDC, press the HDC switch.
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
• 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
If the driver door is open, the park brake is on,
or the vehicle is not in 4WD LOW range then
HDC will be disabled.
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th= 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving only. At vehicle speeds above 20 mph
(32 km/h), HDC remains enabled but does not
function. If the vehicle speed is maintained
above 20 mph ( 32 km/h) for more than 70 seconds HDC will be disabled. When the vehicle
speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), HDC
function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed.
If the vehicle speed goes above 40 mph
(64 km/h) then HDC will immediately disable.
• 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
• REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
• NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
• PARK = HDC remains enabled but not active
239
Select Speed Control (SSC) —
Four-Wheel Drive Models With MP3023
Two-Speed Transfer Case Only
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5mph
• Parking brake is released
• Driver door is closed
• Driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Select Speed Control Switch
SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low
Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by
actively controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
240
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met:
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the paddle
shifter’s. Additionally, the SSC set speed is
automatically reduced when climbing a grade
and the level of set speed reduction depends on
the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
• P = No set speed. SSC may be enabled but
will not activate.
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• Driver releases throttle
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• Driver releases brake
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• Transmission is in any selection other than P
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- paddle shifter input is
used for SSC target speed selection and will
put the transmission into ERS but will not
affect the gear chosen by the transmission
unless in Driver Override. During SSC the
transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Driver Override:
• Driver door opens.
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time. While in
driver override the transmission will be in ERS
which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will
shift from 1st through whichever gear is displayed.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
Deactivating SSC
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has an LED which offers feedback
to the driver about the state SSC is in.
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver presses the SSC switch
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) ( SSC exits immediately)
Feedback to the driver:
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver presses the SSC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
deactivates due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
deactivates due to excess speed.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in off
road conditions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for SSC.
241
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the
ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is active. This is
normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is partially off
TIRES — GENERAL
INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Three primary areas are affected by improper
tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and
can result in over-heating and tire failure.
(Continued)
242
WARNING! (Continued)
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven
wear patterns to develop across the tire tread.
These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can
produce a feeling of sluggish response or over
responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage
the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
243
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13
to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed
Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
244
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You
could have a serious collision. Do not drive a
vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle
to handle poorly. The instability could cause
a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets
of four. Never combine them with other types
of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)
and
• The puncture is no greater than ¼" (6 mm)
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Code).
Tire Types
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels
may vary between different all season tires. All
season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use
all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. Summer tires will not
contain the all season designation or mountain/
snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall.
Run Flat Tires
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50
miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid
loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the run flat mode. A run
flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure
is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat
tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring Section for
more information.
Spare Tires
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or
limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
245
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at
any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not
drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
(Continued)
246
WARNING! (Continued)
the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it
is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to
be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above
• Distance driven
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are
stuck.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle’s Service and Warranty Handbook is highly recommended.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to replacement tires in
this section for further information.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire
inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
247
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph
on “Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire
and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example
found in the Tire Safety Information section of
this manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized
tire or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety,
handling, and ride of your vehicle.
248
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other
than that specified for your vehicle. Some
combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling,
and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION
DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-tobody clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, use reduced size
snow chains or traction devices with a maximum projection of 12 mm beyond the tire
profile.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the suggested operating
speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation
will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
249
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”
for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System
will automatically locate the pressure values
displayed in the correct vehicle position
following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forwardcross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation
250
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason,
including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above recommended cold tire placard pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased
to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
be turned off. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the
tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five seconds,
an "Inflate Tire to XXX" message and a graphic
display of the pressure value(s) with the low
tire(s) displayed in a different color. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
251
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure
units in PSI or kPa.
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its
original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in
a different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the "Inflate Tire to XXX" message. The
system will automatically update, the graphic
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
solid when a system fault is detected. The
system fault will also sound a chime. The EVIC
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then followed by a graphic display, with
“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicating
which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer
flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur by any of the following:
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure
units in PSI or kPa.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
252
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly
related to an incorrect sensor location fault. In
this case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the
pressure values are still being received from the
TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the
correct vehicle position. However, the system
still needs to be serviced as long as the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message exists.
NOTE:
There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor
in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to
monitor the tire pressure. If you install the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC
will still display a pressure value in the
different color graphic display and an ⴖInflate to XXX kPaⴖ message will be displayed.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEMⴖ message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a
ⴖSERVICE TPM SYSTEMⴖ message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall
it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To
deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20
minutes above 24 km/h (15 mph). The TPMS
will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values. Beginning with the
next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the EVIC but dashes (--)
will remain in place of the pressure values.
253
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h
(15 mph). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM
Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off, and the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message. The
EVIC will also display pressure values in place
of the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using highquality unleaded gasoline with a minimum research octane rating of 91. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
254
5.7L Engine
Theses engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using highquality unleaded gasoline having an octane
range of 91 to 95. The manufacturer recommends the use of 95 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not
harmful to your engine. However, continued
heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause
damage, and immediate service is required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have
issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC)
which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and
durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer
recommends the use of gasoline that meets the
WWFC specifications if they are available.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives may help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling and stumble. If you
experience these problems, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Methanol
(Methyl or Wood Alcohol) is used in a variety of
concentrations when blended with unleaded
gasoline. You may find fuels containing 3% or
more Methanol along with other alcohols called
cosolvents. Problems that result from using
Methanol/gasoline or Ethanol blends are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE
is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does
not have the negative effects of Methanol.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in
starting and driveability problems and may
damage critical fuel system components.
Ethanol
The manufacturer recommends that your vehicle be operated on fuel containing no more
than 10% Ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from a
reputable supplier may reduce the risk of exceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuel
with abnormal properties. It should also be
noted that an increase in fuel consumption
should be expected when using Ethanolblended fuels, due to the lower energy content
of Ethanol.
Problems that result from using Methanol/
gasoline or E-85 Ethanol blends are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE
is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does
not have the negative effects of Methanol.
CAUTION!
Use of fuel with Ethanol content higher than
10% may result in engine malfunction, starting and operating difficulties, and materials
degradation. These adverse effects could
result in permanent damage to your vehicle.
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
Clean Air Gasoline
Many gasolines are now being blended that
contribute to cleaner air, especially in those
areas where air pollution levels are high. These
new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and
some are referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
The manufacturer supports these efforts toward
cleaner air. You can help by using these blends
as they become available.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emission system
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal
may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
255
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the
engine in a closed area, such as a garage,
and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If
the vehicle is stopped in an open area with
the engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep the swing gate closed when driving
your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide
and other poisonous exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under the headlamp switch).
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice
buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
(Continued)
256
Fuel Filler Door
2. Open the fuel filler door.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe
– the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the
latches allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door
to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
door open.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left
storage bin, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door,
push the release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the closed
position.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
Release Cable
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
257
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the
manual release cable has been activated,
the actuator latch should be manually returned to the closed position.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver’s side door
or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of
your vehicle including driver, passengers, ve258
hicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers,
options and cargo.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and
with no occupants or cargo loaded into the
vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values
are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or
cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of
either the front or rear axles has been exceeded
but the total load is within the specified GVWR.
If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and
handles and the way the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
CAUTION! (Continued)
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer
towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on
the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
(Continued)
259
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE:
The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
260
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most
cases it should not be more than 10% of the
trailer load. You must consider this as part of the
load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the
hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically
provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or
reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate
the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration / loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result
in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for
your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy
Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs
(4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the
Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally
installed on your vehicle.
261
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine
Model
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
3.6L
4x2
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L
4x4
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L
4x2
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
5.7L
4x4
55 sq ft (5.11 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
262
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. The addition of passengers and
cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load
and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to
avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the
weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10%
to 15% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of
control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many
trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum
tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered
as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and
Loading Information Placard” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Towing Requirements
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
(Continued)
263
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Service
and Warranty Handbook.” Refer to “Service and
Warranty Handbook” for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer
towing as safe as possible:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
(Continued)
264
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow
vehicle transmission in PARK. For fourwheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block
or "chock" the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer
such that the following four ratings are
not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized .
Towing Requirements – Tires
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with
that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires –
General Information” in “Starting and Operating”
for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating”
for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing
a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge
actuated brake system, an electronic brake
controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload
your brake system and cause it to fail. You
might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a fourand seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
265
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE,
you can use the Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower gear.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will
improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and
heat buildup. This action will also provide
better engine braking.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
266
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer up in an area
away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
Paddle Shift Mode
• When using the Paddle Shift switches, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent downshifts.
For example, choose “5” if the desired speed
can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheel OFF the Ground
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Front
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
OK
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
OK
OK
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
267
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must
be placed in Transport Mode before tying
them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift™ – If
Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
more information. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure
to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
tie-down tension.
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel
Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF
the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
268
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing – Quadra–
Trac II® /Quadra–Drive® II Four-Wheel
Drive Models
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in
PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL
(N) selection button is adjacent to the transfer
case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with
the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a dolly is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these procedures can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for
four seconds. The light behind the N symbol will
blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR WHEEL
DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the
engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift™ air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
269
6. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL
(N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL
10. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns off.
Turning the engine off will automatically place
the transmission in PARK.
11. Press the ENGINE STOP/START button
again (without pressing the brake pedal), if
needed, to turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
12. Firmly apply the parking brake.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
270
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be
met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button
or are no longer met during the shift, then
the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are
met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is
released.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/
RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with QuadraLift™ air suspension, the engine should
be started and left running for a minimum
of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed)
at least once every 24 hours. This process
allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for
one second.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/
RUN position for a shift to take place and
for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements
have not been met.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be
met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button
or are no longer met during the shift, the
NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are
met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is
released.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
271
272
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Road Tire Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .
• MANUAL PARK RELEASE– 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION
• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Two-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.274
.274
.275
.275
.275
.275
.276
.279
.280
.280
.281
.282
.283
.284
.286
.287
.288
273
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flasher. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Press the switch a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
• On the highways — slow down.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
flashers may wear down your battery.
274
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it
off. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the
A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control
to maximum heat, the mode control to
floor and the blower control to high. This
allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn
the engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should not
be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a
firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
NOTE:
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located on top of the spare tire. If your
vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel
can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For
more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And
Operating” in this manual.
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools
are located in rear cargo area, below the load
floor.
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in
the rear cargo area and is secured to the body
with a special wing nut.
Preparations For Jacking
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this information could cause damage to the vehicle or
underbody components.
(Continued)
Jack Storage Location
275
NOTE:
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled.
diagonally opposite of
the jacking position. For
example, if changing
the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
NOTE:
Passengers
should
not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle
is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to “Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information on disabling automatic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on
a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.”
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
(Continued)
276
WARNING! (Continued)
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jack and Tool Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn, while
the wheel is still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
277
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the
rear tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
Rear Jacking Location
278
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip
off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise
the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. The correct wheel nut tightness is 110
ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position
and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely
store the road wheel in the cargo area.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly secure
the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued
to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall the jack and tool kit
foam tray, and latch the rear load floor cover.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
Stowed Spare
279
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is
110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or
service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a
280
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under the hood to assist in jumpstarting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away
from the battery.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected ends of the
cables do not touch while still connected to
the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to
LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on
the cover to remove it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result
in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
281
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post
(-) of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
282
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular
phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine
from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Press
and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Press the ⴖESC Offⴖ switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, press the ⴖESC Offⴖ switch again to
restore ⴖESC Onⴖ mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s
wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without
WARNING! (Continued)
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
283
WARNING! (Continued)
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE– 8
SPEED TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake, before activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
(Continued)
284
WARNING! (Continued)
away if it is not secured by the parking brake
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the
vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases
where the transmission will not shift out of
PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park
Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
Manual Park Release Cover
2. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
1. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away from the console hinges.
Release Latch
3. While the metal latch is the open position,
simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap
until it clicks and releases out of the park
position.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension upward while pushing the release
latch towards the tether to unlock the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked be sure it is stowed
properly and locks into position.
Stowed Position
Released Position
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly apply the parking brake.
Release Latch
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it
back in place.
285
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed
as described under “Recreational Towing” in the
“Starting and Operating” section.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
286
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift™ must
be placed in Transport mode, before tying
them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck. Refer to the section on
Quadra-Lift™ for more information. If the
vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level
(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs
must be fastened to the axles (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions
may cause fault codes to be set and/or
cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
2WD Models
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
Front
4WD Models
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under
“Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
OK
NOT ALLOWED
ALL
BEST METHOD
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow
bar or other towing device to main structural
members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to
“Manual Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK for towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using
a flatbed.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL see
“Manual Park Release” in this section for
more information.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h). See “Manual Park Release” in this
section for information on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the
front wheels in the straight position) with the
rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
287
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
288
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a twospeed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL position, and therefore
must be towed with all four wheels OFF the
ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
•
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . .
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . .
• Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Synthetic Engine Oils . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Materials Added To Engine Oils . . . . . .
• Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Filters
• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . .
• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . .
• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . .
• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . .
• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.291
.292
.293
.293
.293
.294
.295
.295
.295
.295
.296
.296
.297
.298
.298
.300
.300
.301
.304
289
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
290
• Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . .
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If Equipped
• Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . .
• Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . .
• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.306
.306
.307
.308
.311
.311
.316
.316
.318
.318
.318
.318
.319
.319
.320
.321
.321
.321
.322
.323
.323
.324
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
291
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
— Power Distribution Center
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
292
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and drivability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/
scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly
recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use
of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and
repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required
maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in
the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other
components which may require servicing or
replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or
perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs,
damage to other components or negatively
impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by
an authorized dealer or qualified repair
center.
(Continued)
293
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved
fluids that protect the performance and
durability of your vehicle and also allow
extended maintenance intervals. Do not
use chemical flushes in these components
as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component
malfunction, use only the specified fluid for
the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the
correct level. The best time to check the engine
oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off or before starting
the engine after it has sat overnight.
294
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level
range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when
the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will
result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Selection – Non ACEA
Categories
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API certified and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means
that the oil has
been certified by the
American
Petroleum Institute (API).
The manufacturer
only recommends
API Certified engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine
oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection – ACEA Categories
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil
Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils
that meet the requirements of ACEA C3, and
that are approved to Fiat 9.55535-S1 or Fiat
9.55535-S3.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat
9.55535-S1 or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used
when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS6395 is not available.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location, refer
to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this
section.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And
Filters
NOTE:
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat
9.55535-S1 or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used
when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS6395 is not available.
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
your local authorized dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add supplemental materials, other than
leak detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product, and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow
type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR®
engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and
are recommended.
295
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Maintenance-Free Battery
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are
a high quality filter and are recommended.
296
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately
with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants
WARNING! (Continued)
or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located on the DVD, for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk
of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the
blower is operating or personal injury may
result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove box. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door.
(Continued)
297
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure
the filter cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position.
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs
fully engage the cover.
298
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically
with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR®
Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior
to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove
dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and
grease should be removed. Particular attention
should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When perform-
ing other underhood services, the hood latch,
release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades
may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm
upward, this will allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and
rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin
from the wiper blade holder.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper
blade holder at the end of the wiper arm, and
firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into
place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot
cap into place.
299
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid
level will be indicated. When the sensor detects
a low fluid level, the windshield will light on the
vehicle graphic outline and the “WASHER
FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment,
be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up
of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
300
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised when
filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly
tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and
prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties
being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition, when the transmission is in gear and
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by
an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
301
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system
pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by
draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap
is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant
recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze),
may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any
“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze).
If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be flushed with OAT
coolant and replaced with the specified
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon
as possible.
(Continued)
302
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS12106) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and
distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to
maintain the proper level of protection against
freezing according to the temperatures occurring
in the area where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant
are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon
as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT”
on the cooling system pressure cap are a
safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap
to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to
remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by
303
a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
304
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few
miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the
engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and
being vaporized when the thermostat opens,
allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS-12106) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Service and
Warranty Handbook” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can
result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning
lamp indicates system failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there
is a “MAX” dot and a “MIN” dot. The fluid level
must be kept within these two dots. Do not add
fluid above the MAX mark, because leakage
may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by
a leak and a system check should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,
and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair
its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on
the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
305
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between
1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole
and the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be between
1/8 in (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole
and the bottom of the fill hole.
306
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on
axles with aluminum housings. The rear axle fill
and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to
52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with cast iron
housings.
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could
damage then and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
transfer case assembly should be inspected. If
oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the
hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and
fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten.
You could damage them and cause them to
leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using
the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit
your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur.
Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However change the fluid and filter if the
307
fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.),
or if the transmission is disassembled for any
reason.
Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From
Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice, and
chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
308
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your
vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR®
Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse
the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk
be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches
as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water
to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake
dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use
oven cleaner. These products may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic
car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total
Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean,
damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® MultiPurpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
309
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights (if equipped) that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
310
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right
rear quarter window equipped with the radio
antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid
scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is
used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total
Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.
Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse
is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds
to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F03
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
60
Amp
Yellow
Rad Fan
F08
40
Amp
Green
Emission sensors (Diesel
engine only)
F05
40
Amp
Green
Compressor for
Air Suspension
if equipped
F09
40
Amp
Green
Diesel Fuel
Heater (Diesel
engine only)
F06
40
Amp
Green
Antilock
Brakes/
Electronic Stability Control
Pump
F10
40
Amp
Green
Body Controller
/ Exterior Lighting #2
F11
F07
40
Amp
Green
Starter
Solenoid
30
Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow
Electric Brake If Equipped
F12
40
Amp
Green
Body Controller
#3 / Interior
Lights
311
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F13
F14
Description
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
40
Amp
Green
Blower Motor
Front
F23
F24
40
Amp
Green
Body Controller
#4 / Power
Locks
30
Amp
Pink
Headrest Release - If
Equipped
F20
30
Amp
Pink
Passenger
Door Module
F22
20
Amp
Yellow
Engine Control
Module
F17
312
Micro
Fuse
F25
F26
F28
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
30
Amp
Pink
Body Controller
#1
F29
Trailer Tow
Parking Lights If Equipped
30
Amp
Pink
Driver Door
Module
20
Amp
Yellow
F30
30
Amp
Pink
Front Wipers
30
Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow Receptacle - If
Equipped
F32
Drive Train
Control Module
30
Amp
Pink
Antilock
Brakes/Stability
Control
Module/Valves
30
Amp
Pink
F34
30
Amp
Pink
Slip Differential
Control
20
Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow
Backup Lights If Equipped
F35
30
Amp
Pink
Sunroof - If
Equipped
F36
30
Amp
Pink
Rear Defroster
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F37
F38
F39
F40
F42
F44
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
30
Amp
Pink
Rear Blower If Equipped
30
Amp
Pink
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F46
10
Amp
Red
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Power Inverter
115V AC - If
Equipped
F49
10
Amp
Red
30
Amp
Pink
Power Liftgate
- If Equipped
F50
10
Amp
Red
Daytime Running Lights
20
Amp
Yellow
Horn
10
Amp
Red
Diagnostic Port
F51
F52
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
F53
Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
20
Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow –
Left Turn/Stop
Lights - If
Equipped
F56
20
Amp
Yellow
Air Suspension
Control Module
- If Equipped
15
Amp
Blue
Additional Content (Diesel
engine only)
F57
15
Amp
Blue
Transmission
10
Amp
Red
Ignition Node
Module / Keyless Ignition /
Steering Column Lock
F59
10
Amp
Red
Purging Pump
(Diesel engine
only)
F60
15
Amp
Blue
Transmission
Control Module
F62
10
Amp
Red
Air Conditioning Clutch
5
Amp
Tan
Battery Sensor
Cartridge
Fuse
313
Cavity
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F63
20
Amp
Yellow
Ignition Coils
(Gas), Urea
Heater (Diesel)
F64
25
Amp
Natural
F66
F67
314
Cartridge
Fuse
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F68
20
Amp
Yellow
Rear Wiper
Motor
Fuel Injectors /
Powertrain
F70
20
Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump Motor
10
Amp
Red
Sunroof / Passenger Window
Switches / Rain
Sensor
F71
30
Amp
Green
Audio Amplifier
F73
15
Amp
Blue
CD / DVD /
Bluetooth
Hands-free
Module - If
Equipped
15
Amp
Blue
HID Headlamps Right
F74
20
Amp
Yellow
Brake Vacuum
Pump - If
Equipped
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
F76
10
Amp
Red
Antilock
Brakes/
Electronic Stability Control
F77
10
Amp
Red
Drivetrain Control Module/
Front Axle Disconnect
Module
F78
10
Amp
Red
Engine Control
Module / Electric Power
Steering - If
Equipped
F80
10
Amp
Red
Universal Garage Door
Opener / Compass / AntiIntrusion Module
Cavity
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
F81
20
Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow
Right Turn/Stop
Lights
F87
F82
10
Amp
Red
Steering Column Control
Module/ Cruise
Control
F83
10
Amp
Red
Fuel Door
F84
15
Amp
Blue
Switch Bank/
Instrument
Cluster
10
Amp
Red
Airbag Module
10
Amp
Red
Airbag Module
F85
F86
Cartridge
Fuse
F88
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
Cavity
10
Amp
Red
Air Suspension
/ Trailer Tow /
Steering Column Control
Module
15
Amp
Blue
Instrument
Panel Cluster
F90/
F91
20
Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
(Rear seats)
Selectable
F92
10
Amp
Red
Rear Console
Lamp - If
Equipped
F93
20
Amp
Yellow
Cigar Lighter
Cartridge
Fuse
Micro
Fuse
Description
F94
10
Amp
Red
Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95
10
Amp
Red
Rear Camera /
Park Assist
F96
10
Amp
Red
Rear Seat
Heater Switch /
Flashlamp
Charger - If
Equipped
F97
25
Amp
Natural
Rear Heated
Seats &
Heated Steering Wheel - If
Equipped
F98
25
Amp
Natural
Front Heated
Seats - If
Equipped
315
Cavity
Micro
Fuse
Description
F99
10
Amp
Red
Climate Control
/ Driver Assistance Systems
Module
F100
10
Amp
Red
Active Damping
- If Equipped
F101
15
Amp
Blue
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Smart High
Beams - If
Equipped
10
Amp
Red
Cabin Heater
(Diesel engine
only)
20
Amp
Yellow
Power Outlets
(Instrument
Panel/Center
Console)
F103
F104
316
Cartridge
Fuse
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 21 days you may want to take steps to
protect your battery. You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Box Lamp
194
Grab Handle Lamp
L002825W5W
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp
214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp
V26377
Bulb Number
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
906
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
103
Telltale/Hazard
Lamp
74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low
Beam)
Premium Headlamps
(Low/High Beam)
Headlamps (High
Beam)
Premium Park/Turn
Signal Lamp
Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
H11
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
9005
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
3157K
Bulb Number
Premium Daytime
Running Lamp
(DRL)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps
H11
Front Side Marker
W5W
Premium Front Side
Marker - If Equipped
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn
Lamp
T20
Rear Body Side
Turn Signal Lamps
7440NA (WY21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail
Lamps
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup
Lamps
Rear License
Lamps
Rear Body Side
Stop Lamps
Bulb Number
Rear Body Side Tail
Lamps
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
CHMSL - Center
High Mounted Stop
Lamp
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized
dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your
authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Service Manual.
921 (W16W)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
P27/7W
317
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate
the clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
(HID) – If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and
the key removed. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps when the headlamp switch is
(Continued)
318
WARNING! (Continued)
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical
shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps , when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes
more white after approximately 10 seconds,
as the system charges.
Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter
turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash
shield and disconnect the wiring harness from
the fog lamp connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing.
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp
bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb
opening on the back of the front fog lamp
housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward
to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the
index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into
the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into
place and are fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog
lamp connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal
Lamps
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove
from lamp.
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp
housing.
319
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counter clockwise.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to
pry the lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
1 — Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and
reattach the lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
320
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED.
Service at Authorized Dealer.
Rear License Lamp
1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at
Authorized Dealer
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
3.6L
5.7L
Power
148 kW @ 5,100 RPM
240 kW @ 5,000 RPM
Torque
Maximum Vehicle Speed
315 N.m @ 3,900 RPM
500 N.m @ 4,000 RPM
Consult your Salesperson
Consult your Salesperson
321
NOTE:
A chime will sound if the vehicle speed
exceeds 75 mph (120 km/h). It will continue
to chime until the vehicle speed is reduced
below 75 mph (120 km/h).
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
25 Gallons
94 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
10.4 Quarts
9.9 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts
14.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts
15.2 Liters
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
Cooling System*
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
322
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – Non ACEA Categories (3.6L Engine)
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – ACEA Categories (3.6L Engine)
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend you use
engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3, and approved to Fiat 9.55535. SAE 5W-30 engine
oil approved to Fiat 9.55535 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.
Engine Oil – Non ACEA Categories (5.7L Engine)
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-CR1 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
is not available.
Engine Oil – ACEA Categories (5.7L Engine)
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, we recommend you use
engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3, and approved to Fiat 9.5535. SAE 5W-30 engine oil
approved to Fiat 9.55535 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
323
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
91 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
91 Octane Acceptable - 95 Octane Recommended
Chassis
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
We recommend you only use Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I®)
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II®)
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) in
addition with friction modifier additive.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API-GL5).
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic
Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 (API-GL5).
324
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine
For EHPS systems, we recommend use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting
MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
325
326
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
327
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Refer to the “Service and Warranty Handbook”
for maintenance schedules.
328
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
329
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer’s distributors are vitally interested in your satisfaction with their products
and services. If a servicing problem or other
difficulty should occur, we recommend that you
take the following steps:
• Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer
with the dealer principal or the service manager. Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve
the problem quickly.
• Should this fail to resolve the problem, contact the manufacturer’s distributor nearest to
your location.
330
When you contact the distributor, please provide all of the following information:
• Your name, address and phone number.
• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17–digit
number is available from a plate, visible
through the windshield in the upper corner of
the instrument panel on the driver’s side. It is
also available from your vehicle registration
or title).
• Selling and servicing authorized dealer.
• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometer
distance.
• Service history of your vehicle.
• An accurate description of the problem and
the conditions under which it occurs.
331
332
10
INDEX
333
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .302
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 44
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . .43, 46, 62, 155
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 42, 44
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . .41, 42, 44
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . .297
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . .198, 297
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .199
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . .297
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . .197, 297
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . .15, 155
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . .8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .302, 322
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .232
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .151
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
334
Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .25
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . .71
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .197
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .210, 307
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . .307
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . .136
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Keyless Transmitter Replacement
(RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 61
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . .298
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . .232
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Brake System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . .209
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . .60
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .316, 318
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Caps, Filler
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . .303
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . .61
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . .321
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . .61
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Child Safety Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . .207
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . .192
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .303
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .302
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . .303
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .302
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .301, 304
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . .304
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .302, 322
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . .104
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Customer Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . .144
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .62, 195
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . .303
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . .136
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . .144
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .232
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . .233
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . .233
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . .102, 104
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .234
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . .282
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .274
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . .60
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 292
Compartment Identification . . . .291, 292
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . .28, 61
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . .254, 322
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294, 322
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . .294
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .152
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
335
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . .295
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .44
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . .17
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . .28, 61
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 300
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . .198, 297
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Turn Signal . . . . . . . .63, 151, 318, 319
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . .207
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .307
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . .323
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 319
Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
336
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . .117
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . .274
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 219
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Four Wheel Drive Operation. . . . . . . . .215
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .282
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . .306
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .254, 322
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Gasoline, Clean Air. . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature
Fuel . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .255
. . . . . . . . . . .254
. . . . . . . . . .152
. . . . . . . . . . .154
. . . . . . . . . . .151
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
General Information . . . . . . . . .15, 19, 115
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . .260
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . .259
GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .274
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 144
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . .14
Infant Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . .149
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . .310
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . .309
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . .97
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jacking Instructions
Jack Location . . . .
Jack Operation . . .
Jump Starting . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.276
.275
.276
.280
Key-In Reminder . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . .
Keyless Entry System . .
Keyless Go . . . . . . . .
Key, Programming . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .13
.22, 206
. . . .17
. . . .12
. . . .15
. . . .15
. . . .12
. . . .14
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . .144
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 91
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 46, 62, 155
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . .92
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .242
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . .321
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . .91
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 319
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .274
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . .92
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . .151
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . .152
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .151
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . .155
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .154
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Turn Signal . . . . . . . .63, 91, 318, 319
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . .296
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . .293
Maintenance Schedule. . . . . . . . . . . .328
337
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . .87
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . .87
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Power Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . .8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . .250
Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . .91
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . .225
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . .225
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . .295
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295, 322
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Onboard Diagnostic System. . . . . . . . .293
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .72
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . .153, 274
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . .6
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . .311
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .136
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78, 79
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 230
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 134
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . .100
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts. . . . . . .38
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . .275
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Programming Transmitters (Remote
Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . .60
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . .120, 124
Passing Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Radial Ply Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . .303
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . .191
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . .99
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . .28, 42, 45
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . .40, 41, 42, 44
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . .254
338
Quadra-Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Rear Cupholder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . .120, 124
Rear Seat, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .218, 270
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . .191
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . .142
Roll Over Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . .61
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . .63
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . .28, 61
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .328
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 61
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . .33
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . .38
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . .33
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . .34
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . .155
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . .14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Automatic Transmission . . . . . .208, 210
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . .63, 151, 318, 319
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .249
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .245, 246, 275
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .102, 104
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .205
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . .207
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 230
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
339
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . .191
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 316
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 316
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 134
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag. . .39
Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .100
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . .197
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . .152
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .143
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 242
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .247
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .242
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
340
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .250
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .154
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .247
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . .263
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .283
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 286
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Traction Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . .235
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .267
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . .263
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . .263
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 307
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . .17
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 318, 319
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . .34
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . .198, 316
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .274
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .97, 300
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Wheel and Wheel Trim. . . . . . . . . . . .309
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . .309
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . .26, 133, 135
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . .298
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . .298
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . .99
341
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement